ML081370218: Difference between revisions

From kanterella
Jump to navigation Jump to search
(Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(StriderTol Bot change)
 
(One intermediate revision by the same user not shown)
Line 18: Line 18:


=Text=
=Text=
{{#Wiki_filter:(7)CASx(CASAorCASB)
{{#Wiki_filter:(7)
accident signal(after5seconddelayviaBBRXrelay)OPL171.036
CASx (CASA or CASB) accident signal
Revision 11Page24of58-122"RxVLOR2.45DWPAND
(after 5 second delay via BBRX relay)
<450#RPV I.4kV ShutdownBoards(NormalPowerSeeking)1.Powersources
OPL171.036
a.4kV suppliestoeach U1/2 Shutdown Board:areasfollows:BoardNORMALSupplyAShutdownBus1BShutdownBus1CShutdownBus2DShutdownBus2Thefirstalternateisfromthe
Revision 11
other ShutdownBus.Thesecond
Page 24 of 58
alternateisfromthediesel
-122" RxVL OR
generator.Thethird alternateisfromtheU3
2.45 DWP AND
diesel generatorsviaaU3 Shutdown Board.b.Therearetwopossible4kV
< 450# RPV
suppliestoeach U3 Shutdown Board:BoardNORMALSupply3EAUnitBoard3A3EBUnitBoard3A3ECUnitBoard3B3EDUnitBoard3B(1)Thefirstalternateisfromthediesel
I.
generators.
4kV Shutdown Boards
The U1/2 diesel generators
(Normal Power Seeking)
cannot supply powertotheU3ShutdownBoardsalone.
1.
Theymay,however,be
Power sources
paralleledwiththeU3diesel generatorsforbackfeed
a.
operation.Thetie breakerofftheunit3
4kV supplies to each U1/2 Shutdown Board:
ShutdownBoardis interlocked
are as follows:
as follows:Refertoprints15E-500seriesKeyDiagramof STDBYAux.PowerSystem
Board
Obj.V.B.6.cObj.V.C.1.c
NORMAL Supply
Obj.V.D.6.c SBO 3%viabustie board%%viaotherSOBus
A
7.ShutdownBoardTransferSchemea.Theonlyautomatic
Shutdown Bus 1
transferofpoweronashutdownboardisadelayed(slow)transfer.Inorderforthetransfertotakeplace,thebus
B
transfercontrolswitch(43Sx)mustbein
Shutdown Bus 1
AUTOMATIC.OPL171.036
C
Revision 11 Page 31of58Obj.V.B.8.cObj.V.C.2.cObj.V.D.8.c
Shutdown Bus 2
ProceduralAdherencewhen
D
Shutdown Bus 2
The first alternate is from the other Shutdown
Bus. The second alternate is from the diesel
generator. The third alternate is from the U3
diesel generators via a U3 Shutdown Board.
b.
There are two possible 4kV supplies to each
U3 Shutdown Board:
Board
NORMAL Supply
3EA
Unit Board 3A
3EB
Unit Board 3A
3EC
Unit Board 3B
3ED
Unit Board 3B
(1)
The first alternate is from the diesel
generators. The U1/2 diesel
generators cannot supply power to the
U3 Shutdown Boards alone. They
may, however, be paralleled with the
U3 diesel generators for backfeed
operation. The tie breaker off the unit 3
Shutdown Board is interlocked as
follows:
Refer to prints
15E-500 series Key
Diagram of STDBY
Aux. Power System
Obj. V.B.6.c
Obj. V.C.1.c
Obj. V.D.6.c
SBO
3
% via bustie
board
%
% via other
SO Bus
 
7.
Shutdown Board Transfer Scheme
a.
The only automatic transfer of power on a
shutdown board is a delayed (slow) transfer.
In order for the transfer to take place, the bus
transfer control switch (43Sx) must be in
AUTOMATIC.
OPL171.036
Revision 11
Page 31 of 58
Obj. V.B.8.c
Obj. V.C.2.c
Obj. V.D.8.c
Procedural
Adherence when
transferring
transferring
boards (**b(1)Undervoltageissensedonthelinesideofthenormal
boards
feeder breaker.(2)Voltageisavailableonthelinesideofthealternatefeederbreaker.(3)Thenormalfeeder
(
breaker thenreceivesatripsignal.(4)A52bcontactonthenormalsupplybreakershutsintheclosecircuitofthealternatefeederbreaker,indicatingthatthenormal
**b
breaker is open.(5)Aresidualvoltagerelayshutsintheclosecircuitofthealternatesupplybreaker,indicatingthat
(1)
ooar a voltagebasdecayedtolessthan30percentofnormal.(6)Thealternatesupply
Undervoltage is sensed on the line
breaker then closes.Theshutdownboard
side of the normal feeder breaker.
transferschemeisNORMALseeking.Ifpowerisrestoredtothelinesideofthenormal
(2)
feederbreaker,andifthe43SxswitchisstillinAUTOMATIC,thena"slow" transferbacktothenormalsupplywilloccur.Thiswillcause
Voltage is available on the line side of
momentarypowerlosstoloadsonthebusandESFactuationsarepossible.ManualHighSpeed(Fast
the alternate feeder breaker.
Transfer)Tofast transferashutdownboardperformthe
(3)
following:Obj.V.B.8.cObj.V.C.2.cReviewINPOSOER83-06  
The normal feeder breaker then
OPL171.036Revision11Page32of58
receives a trip signal.
((1)Ensure voltage is availablefromtheProceduralalternatesource.
(4)
Adherence(2)Place43SxswitchtoMANUAL.
A 52b contact on the normal supply
(3)Place alternate breakerSYNCswitch
breaker shuts in the close circuit of
Self ChecktoON.(4)Place alternate supply breaker switchinCLOSE.(5)Placenormal
the alternate feeder breaker,
supply breakerswitchin TRIP.(6)Alternate breakercloseswhen52b
indicating that the normal breaker is
Alternatesupplyis contactfromnormal
open.
breakercloses,notaqualifiedOff-indicatingthat
(5)
breakerhasopened.Ifsitesupply
A residual voltage relay shuts in the
the Alternate SupplyfromSOBusisclosedtoaUnit1/2SIDBoard,an AccidentSignalwilltripitopen.(7)Turn offSYNCswitch.
close circuit of the alternate supply
(8)DONOTplace
breaker, indicating that ooara voltage
43Sxswitchbackto
bas decayed to less than 30 percent
AUTOMATIC (Transferbackto normal supplywouldoccur).
of normal.
Note:IftheSYNC SWwasnotONforSelfCheck the alternatebreaker,a delayed transfer would occurwhenthe normal breaker opensandtheboardresidual
(6)
voltage relay detectslessthan30%voltage, assuming the alternate breaker'scontrolswitchisheldintheCLOSEposition.
The alternate supply breaker then
c.Conditions
closes.
which automaticallytriptheboard
The shutdown board transfer scheme is
transfercontrolswitch(43Sx)to
NORMAL seeking. If power is restored
MANUAL: (1)Normal Feeder Lockout Relay (86-xxx)(2)Alternate Feeder LockoutRelay(86-,xxx)(3)Normal Feeder Control Transfer Switch in EMERGENCY (4)Alternate Feeder Control Transfer-122"RxVLSwitchin EMERGENCY OR ((5)CASx accident signal2.45DWPAND
to the line side of the normal feeder
<450#RPV  
breaker, and if the 43Sx switch is still in
(.-----20.RO 262002 Al.02 OO l/C/Am/GI/UNIT PREFFERRED/C/A 2.5/2.9/262002AA l.02/B F0530I/RO/SRO/lO/27/2007
AUTOMATIC, then a "slow" transfer
G iventhefollowingplantconditions:*Un it3is inanormallineup
back to the normal supply will occur.
.*Thefollowingalarmisreceived
This will cause momentary power loss
:-UNITPFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL*Itis determinedthatthealarm
to loads on the bus and ESF actuations
isduetotheUnit-3Unit
are possible.
Preferred AC Generator Overvoltage
Manual High Speed (Fast Transfer)
condition Wh ichONEofthefollowing
To fast transfer a shutdown board perform the
describes the correctresultofthis
following:
condition?
Obj. V.B.8.c
Assume NO Operator actions.A.Unit3bkr1001tripsopen;Unit2bkr1003interlockedopen
Obj. V.C.2.c
;theMMGset automaticallyshutsdown.B.Unit3bkr1001
Review INPO
interlocked
SOER 83-06
open;Unit2bkr1003tripsopen;theMMGset
 
automaticallyshutsdown.Unit3bkr1001tripsopen
OPL171.036
;Unit2bkr1003interlockedopen
Revision 11
;theMMGset continuestorunwithout
Page 32 of 58
excitat ion.D.Unit3bkr1001
(
interlocked
(1)
open;Un it2bkr1003tripsopen;theMMGsetcont
Ensure voltage is available from the
inuestorunwithout
Procedural
excitation
alternate source.
.KIA Statement:262002UPS(AC/DC)
Adherence
KIA:A1.02Abilityto
(2)
predict and/or monitorchangesin parameters
Place 43Sx switch to MANUAL.
associatedwithoperatingthe
(3)
UNINTERRUPTABLE
Place alternate breaker SYNC switch
POWER SUPPLY (A.C./D.C.)controlsincluding:
Self Check
Motor generator outputs.KIA Justification:
to ON.
This question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequir ing the candidatetocorrectlyapplyaspecificoperatingconditionoftheUPSMMGSettothecorrect
(4)
responseofthe systemtothatcondition.
Place alternate supply breaker switch
in CLOSE.
(5)
Place normal supply breaker switch in
TRIP.
(6)
Alternate breaker closes when 52b
Alternate supply is
contact from normal breaker closes,
not a qualified Off-
indicating that breaker has opened. If
site supply
the Alternate Supply from SO Bus is
closed to a Unit 1/2 SID Board, an
Accident Signal will trip it open.
(7)
Turn off SYNC switch.
(8)
DO NOT place 43Sx switch back to
AUTOMATIC (Transfer back to
normal supply would occur).
Note: If the SYNC SW was not ON for
Self Check
the alternate breaker, a delayed
transfer would occur when the
normal breaker opens and the
board residual voltage relay
detects less than 30% voltage,
assuming the alternate breaker's
control switch is held in the
CLOSE position.
c.
Conditions which automatically trip the board
transfer control switch (43Sx) to MANUAL:
(1 )
Normal Feeder Lockout Relay (86-xxx)
(2)
Alternate Feeder Lockout Relay (86-
,xxx)
(3)
Normal Feeder Control Transfer Switch
in EMERGENCY
(4)
Alternate Feeder Control Transfer
-122" RxVL
Switch in EMERGENCY
OR
(
(5)
CASx accident signal
2.45 DWP AND
< 450# RPV
 
( .
-----
20. RO 262002Al.02 OO l/C/Am/GI/UNIT PREFFERRED/C/A 2.5/2.9/262002AA l.02/BF0530I/RO/SRO/lO/27/2007
Given the following plant conditions:
*
Unit 3 is in a normal lineup.
*
The following alarm is received :
- UNIT PFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL
*
It is determined that the alarm is due to the Unit-3 Unit Preferred AC Generator Overvoltage
condition
Which ONE of the following describes the correct result of this condition? Assume NO Operator actions.
A.
Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.
B. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.
C~ Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set continues to run without
excitation.
D. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set continues to run without
excitation.
KIA Statement:
262002 UPS (AC/DC)
KIA: A1.02 Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the
UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (A.C./D.C.) controls including: Motor generator outputs.
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to correctly apply
a specific operating condition of the UPS MMG Set to the correct response of the system to that condition.
References: OPL171 .102, Rev.6, pg 20 & 21, 3-ARP-9-8B, Rev.9, tile 35
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to solve a problem. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to resolve the problem .
0610 NRC Exam
 
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
(
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. The 1001 and 1003 breakers from an MMG set will trip on overvoltage or underfrequency at the output
of the MMG.
2. Unit 2 MMG Breakers are interlocked to prevent alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at the same time.
3. When an overvoltage condition exists at the Generator Output, the 1001 breaker from the MMG Set
trips.
4. Excitation is lost and the MMG Set continues to run.
5. The Hold to build up voltage switch must be depressed to restore voltage.Also
A is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible because the breaker
lineup is correct.
B is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible although the breaker
lineup is backwards.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. The breaker lineup is backwards. This is plausible because the MMG Set will continue to
run without excitation.
(
 
(
BFN
Unit 1
Panel 1-9-8
1-XA-55-8B
Senso rlTrip Point:
1-ARP-9-8B
Rev. 0009
Page 42 of 42
UNIT PFD
SUPPLY
ABNORMAL
(Page 1 of 1)
Relay SE - loss of normal DC power source .
Relay TS - DC Xfer switch transfers to Emergency DC Power Source.
Regulating Transformer Common Alarm.
1-INV-252-001 , INVT-1 System Common Alarm .
Sensor
Location:
Probable
Cause:
EL 593' 250V DC Battery Board 2
A.
Loss of normal DC power source
B. DC power transfer.
C. Relay failure
D. INVT-1 System Common Alarms
1.
Fan Failure Rectifier
2.
Over temperature Rectifier
3.
AC Power Failure to Rectifier
4.
Low DC Voltage
5.
High DC Voltage
6.
Low DC Disconnect
7.
Fan Failure Inverter
8.
Alternate Source Failure
9.
:Low AC Output Voltage
10. High Output Voltage
11. Inverter Fuse Blown
12. Static Switch Fuse Blown
13. Over Temperature Inverter
E. PFD Regulating XFMR Common Alarms
1.
Transformer Over temperature
2.
Fan Failure
3.
CB1 Breaker Trip
4.
CB2 Breaker Trip
Auto transfer to DC Power Source on Rectifier failure .
Auto transfer to Alternate AC supply (Regulated Transformer) on Inverter failure.
Automatic
A.
Action:
B.
Operator
A.
Action:
B.
IF 120V AC Unit Preferred is lost, THEN
REFER TO 1-AOI-57-4, Loss of Unit Preferred .
REFER TO appropriate portion of 0-OI-57C, 208V/120V AC
Electrical System.
o
o
References:
References:
OPL171.102, Rev.6,pg20&21, 3-ARP-9-8B
, Rev.9,tile35 Level of Knowledge Justification:ThisquestionisratedasCIAduetothe
requirementtoassemble
, sort ,andintegratethepartsofthequestiontosolveaproblem
.This requires mentallyusingthisknowledgeanditsmeaningtoresolvetheproblem
.0610NRCExam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
Analysis: (Inordertoanswerthisquestion
correctlythecandidatemust
determinethefollowing:
1.The1001and1003
breakersfromanMMGsetwilltripon
overvoltage
or underfrequencyattheoutputoftheMMG.2.Unit2MMG
Breakers are interlockedtopreventalternate
powertounit1and3atthesametime.
3.Whenan overvoltage
conditionexistsatthe
GeneratorOutput,the1001
breakerfromtheMMGSet
trips.4.ExcitationislostandtheMMGSet
continuestorun.5.TheHoldto buildupvoltageswitchmustbe
depressedtorestore voltage.AlsoAis incorrect.TheMMGsetdoesnot
automaticallyshutdown.Thisisplausiblebecausethebreakerlineupiscorrect.Bis incorrect.TheMMGsetdoesnot
automaticallyshutdown.Thisisplausiblealthoughthebreakerlineupisbackwards.Cis correct.Dis incorrect.
The breakerlineupis backwards.ThisisplausiblebecausetheMMGSetwillcontinuetorunwithoutexcitation.
(
(BFN Unit 1 Panel 1-9-8 1-XA-55-8B
Senso rlTrip Poin t: 1-ARP-9-8BRev.0009 Page 42 of 42UNITPFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL (Page 1 of 1)RelaySE-loss ofnormalDC power source.RelayTS-DCXferswitch
transfers to Emergency DC Power Source.Regulating
Transforme
rCommonAlarm.
1-INV-252-001
,INVT-1SystemCommonAlarm
.Sensor Location: Probable Cause:EL593'250VDCBatteryBoard2A.LossofnormalDC
power source B.DC power transfer.C.Relayfailure
D.INVT-1 SystemCommonAlarms
1.FanFailure
Rectifier 2.Over temperature
Rectifier 3.AC PowerFailuretoRectifier
4.LowDC Voltage5.HighDC Voltage6.LowDC Disconnect
7.FanFailure
Inverter 8.Alternate Source Failure 9.:LowAC Output Voltage 10.H igh Output Voltage 11.InverterFuseBlown 12.StaticSwitchFuseBlown
13.Over Temperature
InverterE.PFD RegulatingXFMRCommonAlarms
1.Transformer
Over temperature
2.Fan Failure 3.CB1 Breaker Tr ip 4.CB2 Breaker Trip Auto transfertoDC Power SourceonRect ifier failure.Auto transfer to AlternateACsupply (Regulated
Transformer)onInverterfailure.
Automatic A.Action: B.Operator A.Act ion: B.IF 120VACUn itPreferredislost
, THENREFERTO 1-AOI-57-4, Loss ofUnitPreferred
.REFER TO appropriateportionof 0-OI-57C , 208V/120V AC Electrical
System.o o References:
0-45E641-2
0-45E641-2
10-100467 1-45E620-11
10-100467
1-45E620-11
0-20-100756
0-20-100756
1-3300D15A4585-1
1-3300D15A4585-1
20-110437  
20-110437
(b.(d)AnotherUnit'sMMGsetThesecond alternateisfromanotherunit'sMMGsetoutput.Unit2MMGisthesecondalternatefor
 
eitherUnit1orUnit3;Unit3isthesecondalternateforUnit2
(
.Transferstothissourceare
b.
done manuallyatBatteryBoard2panel11.MMGSets(Unit2&3)(1)TheMMGisnormallydrivenBytheACmotor,poweredfrom
(d)
480VShutdownBoardA.Shouldthissupplyfail,theAC
Another Unit's MMG set
motor is automatically
The second alternate is from
disconnectedandtheDCmotorstarts,poweredfrom250VBatteryBoard.TheDCmotorhasanalternate
another unit's MMG set
powersupplyfrom
output. Unit 2 MMG is the
another 250V Battery Board.Transfertothe alternateDCsourceismanual.
second alternate for either
Underfrequencyonthe generatoroutputwilltriptheDCmotor.TransferoftheMMGsetbacktotheACmotorismanual.(2)The1001and1003breakersfromanMMGsetwilltripon
Unit 1 or Unit 3; Unit 3 is the
overvoltage
second alternate for Unit 2.
or underfrequencyatthe output oftheMMG.AlsoUnit2MMGBreakersareinterlockedtopreventalternatepowertounit1and3atthesametime
Transfers to this source are
.OPL171.102Revision6Page20of69Obj.V.B.2.b TP-11 Obj'v.D.2.c Obj.V.D.2.d/jObjV.E.2.c
done manually at Battery
Obj'v.E.2.d/iObjV.B.2.h Obj'v.C.3.e
Board 2 panel 11.
MMG Sets (Unit 2&3)
(1)
The MMG is normally driven By the
AC motor, powered from 480V
Shutdown Board A. Should this
supply fail, the AC motor is
automatically disconnected and the
DC motor starts, powered from
250V Battery Board. The DC
motor has an alternate power
supply from another 250V Battery
Board. Transfer to the alternate
DC source is manual.
Underfrequency on the generator
output will trip the DC motor.
Transfer of the MMG set back to
the AC motor is manual.
(2)
The 1001 and 1003 breakers from
an MMG set will trip on overvoltage
or underfrequency at the output of
the MMG. Also Unit 2 MMG
Breakers are interlocked to prevent
alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at
the same time.
OPL171.102
Revision 6
Page 20 of 69
Obj. V.B.2.b
TP-11
Obj'v.D.2.c
Obj.V.D.2.d/j
Obj V.E.2.c
Obj'v.E.2.d/i
Obj V.B.2.h
Obj'v.C.3.e
Obj'v.D.2.j
Obj'v.D.2.j
Obj'v.E.2.i  
Obj'v.E.2.i
(3)WhenanunderfrequencyorovervoltageconditionexistsattheGeneratorOutputthefollowing
 
occurs(a)BBpanel10breakersfromtheMMGSettrip.OPL171.102Revision6Page21of 69Obj.V.B.2.hObj.V.C.3.e
(3)
Obj.V.D.2.jObj.V.E.2.i U2 U31001(U2)
When an under frequency or
1001(U3)1003(U1&3)1003(U2)(b)ExcitationislostandtheMMGSetcontinuestorun.(TheHoldtobuildupvoltageswitchmustbedepressedtorestore
overvoltage condition exists at the
voltage.)  
Generator Output the following
((21.RO 263000KI.02 00 I/MEMlT2G I1250VDC/3/26
occurs
3000KI.02//RO/SROI
(a)
Wh ichONEofthefollowing
BB panel 10 breakers from
statements
the MMG Set trip.
describestheoperat ionof250VDCBattery
OPL171.102
Charger 2B?A.Thenormal power supplytoBattery Charger 2B i s 480V CommonBoard1.8.Battery Charger2Bcansupply
Revision 6
.directlyfromunit2BatteryBoardroom,anyofthesixUnit
Page 21 of 69
&Plant 250VDC battery boards.C.Battery Charger2Bis capable of supplyingtwoBatteryBoards
Obj. V.B.2.h
simultaneously.
Obj. V.C.3.e
0.01Loadsheddingofthe
Obj. V.D.2.j
battery chargercanbe bypassedbyplacingthe
Obj. V.E.2.i
Emergency ON select switch inthe EmergencyONPosition.KIA Statement:263000DCElectrical
U2
Distribution
U3
K1.02-Knowledgeofthe
1001 (U2)
physical connections
1001 (U3)
and/or cause-effect relationships
1003 (U1&3)
between D.C.ELECTRICAL
1003 (U2)
DISTRIBUTIONandthe following: Battery chargerandbattery
(b)
KIA Justification:
Excitation is lost and the
Th is quest ion satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequ iring the candidatetousespecific
MMG Set continues to run.
knowledgeofbattery charger operation.References
(The Hold to build up
:OPL171.037Levelof Knowledge Justification:
voltage switch must be
This questionisratedasMEMduetotherequ
depressed to restore
irementtorecallorrecognized
voltage.)
iscretebitsof information
 
.0610NRCExam
(
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
(
Analysis:Inorderto answer this quest ion cor rectlythecand idate must determine the follow ing: 1.Normaland Alternate power to Battery Charger 2B.2.Loadscapableofbeing
21. RO 263000KI .02 00I/MEMlT2G I1250VDC/3/263000KI .02//RO/SROI
suppliedbyBattery Charger 2B.3.LoadShedd
Wh ich ONE of the following statements describes the operation of 250 VDC Battery Charger 2B?
ing log icandbypass capabil ity.Aisincorrect.Thisis plausible because 480V CommonBoard1 isthe Alternate supplytoBattery Charger 2B.Bis incorrect.Thisis plausible because Battery Charger 2B i s capable of supply ing any ofthes ix 250VBatteryBoards
A.
, but NOT directlyfromUnit2BatteryBoardRoom
The normal power supply to Battery Charger 2B is 480V Common Board 1.
.Cis incorrect.
8.
Thisisplaus ible because Battery Charger2Bis sufficiently large enough to support the loads , but mechanical
Battery Charger 2B can supply . directly from unit 2 Battery Board room, any of the six Unit & Plant
interlocks preventclosingmorethanone
250VDC battery boards.
output feeder breaker.D iscorrect.  
C.
((2)The Plant/Station
Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying two Battery Boards simultaneously.
Batteries(4,5,and6)are
0 .01
ClassNon-1Eandareutilized
Load shedding of the battery charger can be bypassed by placing the Emergency ON select
primarilyforU-2,U-1,andU-3
switch in the Emergency ON Position.
respectively
KIA Statement:
--fornormalloadsOPL171.037 Revision 10Page11of70ObjV.B.1Obj.V.C.1Obj.V.D.1 (3)Battery(4)RoomislocatedonUnit3inthe
263000 DC Electrical Distribution
TurbineBuildingonElev.586
K1.02 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between D.C.
(4)Battery(5&6)Roomsare
ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and the following: Battery charger and battery
locatedonthe TurbineFloor,Elev.617(5)The boards and chargersfortheUnit
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
Batteries are locatedinBatteryBoard
knowledge of battery charger operation.
Rooms adjacenttothe batteriestheyserve,withthe
References:
spare chargerbeingintheUnit2
OPL171.037
Battery Board room.(BatteryBoards5&6and
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
their associated
or recognize discrete bits of information.
chargersarelocated
0610 NRC Exam
adjacent to the batteries,butareintheopen
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
spaceofthe turbine floor.)c.250V Plant DC components
Plausibility Analysis:
(1)Battery charger(a)The battery chargers are ofthesolid state rectifiertype.They normally supply loadsonthe 250VPlantDC DistributionSystem.Uponlossof
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
powertothecharger,the
1. Normal and Alternate power to Battery Charger 2B.
battery suppliestheloads.(b)Themainbank
2. Loads capable of being supplied by Battery Charger 2B.
chargers only provide float and equalize charge whentiedto theirloads.The chargersarenot placedonfast charge (high voltage equalize)withanyloads
3. Load Shedding logic and bypass capability.
attached.(c)They can rechargeafully discharged
A is incorrect. This is plausible because 480V Common Board 1 is the Alternate supply to Battery
batteryin12hourswhile
Charger 2B.
supplying normal loads.(d)Battery charger power suppliesareFollow Procedure manual transfer only.(250V Battery Normal Source Alternate Source Charaer (Charger Service bus)1 480VSDBd1A 480V CommonBd1Comp6D Comp 3A 2A 480VSDBd2A 480V CommonBd1 Comp6DComp3A 2B 480VSDBd2B 480V CommonBd1 Comp6D Comp 3A 3 480VSDBd3A 480V CommonBd1Comp6D Comp3AObj.V.B.2 Obj.V.C.2 Obj V.D.2  
B is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying any of the six 250V
(4 5 480VSOBd3B Com 60 480VComBd1Com5C 480V CommonBd1Com3A (no alternate)OPL171.037Revision10Page12of70
Battery Boards, but NOT directly from Unit 2 Battery Board Room.
63(no alternate)2Bspare charger DC outputcanbedirectedtoanyoffourfeeders.ThreeDC
C is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is sufficiently large enough to support the
outputscanbe connected to batteryboard1,2,or3.Thefourth
loads, but mechanical interlocks prevent closing more than one output feeder breaker.
output is connectedtoanew output transferswitch(locatedin
D is correct.
batteryboardroom4)which
 
charges batteries4,5,or6plantbatteries.Amec
(
lianical interloc Kpermitsclosing
(2)
onl y: one output feeaeratatime.(Aslidebarisutilizedin
The Plant/Station Batteries (4, 5, and 6) are
batteryboardroom2andaKirkkey
Class Non-1E and are utilized primarily for U-2,
interlockisusedin battery boardroom4 TP-2&TP-7 AttentiontoDetail
U-1, and U-3 respectively --for normal loads
(XI.Summary We have discussed in detailtheDC Power SystemsatBFN.The electrical
OPL 171.037
design and operation which makes these systems so reliable has been explained.
Revision 10
The various systems have been described with reference to function, components, locations, and electrical
Page 11 of 70
loads.Power sources have been identified, and instrumentation
Obj V.B.1
has been noted.Significant
Obj. V.C.1
control and alarm aspects have also been pointed out.OPL171.037Revision10Page31 of 70 250V Battery Charger Normal Source Alternate Source (Charger Service bus)1 480VSOBd1A,Comp
Obj. V.D.1
60 480V CommonBd1,Comp3A
(3)
2A 480VSOBd 2A Comp 60 480V CommonBd1,Comp 3A 2B 480VSOBd2B, Comp 60 480V CommonBd1,Comp3A
Battery (4) Room is located on Unit 3 in the
3 480VSOBd3A,Comp
Turbine Building on Elev. 586
60 480V CommonBd1,Comp3A
(4)
4 480VSOBd3B,Comp
Battery (5 & 6) Rooms are located on the
60 480V CommonBd1,Comp 3A 5 480VComBd1Comp5C (no alternate)
Turbine Floor, Elev. 617
6 480VComBd3Comp3D (no alternate)
(5)
The 2B spare charger DC outputcanbe directed to any of four feeders.Three DC outputscanbe connected to battery board1,2,or3.The fourth DC output is connected to output transfer switch (BBR4)to batteries4,5, or 6.Mechanical
The boards and chargers for the Unit Batteries
interlock permits closing only one output feederatatime.(A
are located in Battery Board Rooms adjacent
slide bar is utilized in battery boardroom2 and a Kirk key interlock is used in battery board room 4.)250V DC battery chargers 1, 2Aand2B will load shed upon receipt of a Unit1or Unit 2 accident signal and any Unit 1/2 shutdown board being suppliedbyits respective
to the batteries they serve, with the spare
diesel generator or cross tiedtoa Unit 3 shutdown boardanda unit three Diesel Generator.
charger being in the Unit 2 Battery Board
250 VDC Battery Charger 3 will load shedona unit 3 load shed signal.eoad shedding feature can be
room. (Battery Boards 5 & 6 and their
by.placing the"Emergency" swi tCii on thecharger.to
associated chargers are located adjacent to
tfie"EMERG" P.Qsition.Station Battery charger 4 does not have load shed logic;however, battery charger4will deenergize
the batteries, but are in the open space of the
when 3B 480 SID Board deenergizes
turbine floor.)
and will return when the 480V SID Board voltage returns.They also supply alternate control power for Units1and2 4kV Shutdown Boards;however, on Unit3,theA,C,and
c.
0 4kV Shutdown Boards receive both normal and alternate control power from the 250V DC Unit Systems.(3EB receives alternate control power only.)The 250V DC RMOV Boards are supplied from the Unit Battery Board as follows: BB-1 supplies 250V RMOV Boards1A,2C,3B.BB-2 supplies 250V RMOVBds2A,1C,3C.  
250V Plant DC components
OPL171.037Revision10Page47 of70 (-=:=:=..=.---480vSOBO1A NOR............
(1)
BATTERY CHARGER No.1 ALT............
Battery charger
480v SO B02A............
(a)
BATTERY CHARGER No.2A ALT.............480vSOBO2B
The battery chargers are of the solid state
NOR............
rectifier type. They normally supply loads
BATTERYCHARGER en No.2B 0: w u..ALT en z 1************
on the 250V Plant DC Distribution
-I-480v SO B03A0..I-NOR;:),.-------.---i
System. Upon loss of power to the
0 I aJ: BATTERY: N CHARGER*0*I-: No.3**ALT:............
charger, the battery supplies the loads.
;480vSOBO3B
(b)
NOR BATTERY CHARGER t--------+-----+--+----i--+---;--i----+---+-
The main bank chargers only provide
____NO.4 1-----'ALT BATTBO1 BATT B02 BATT B03 BATT B04 480v COMMONBO1..............._....................TP-2250VDCPowerDistribution
float and equalize charge when tied to
((22.RO 264000K5.06
their loads. The chargers are not placed
00 l/C/A/T2Gl/82
on fast charge (high voltage equalize)
-DG/9/264000K5
with any loads attached.
.06//RO/SRO
(c)
/Giventhefollowingplantconditions:*Unit2isoperatingatFullPower.*No EquipmentisOutofService.*Alargeleak
They can recharge a fully discharged
occursinthedrywellandthefollowing
battery in 12 hours while supplying
conditions
normal loads.
exist:-DrywellPressurepeakedat28psigandiscurrentlyat20psig
(d)
.-Reactor Pressureisat110psig
Battery charger power supplies are
.-Reactor WaterLevelisat-120inches-Offsite powerisavailable
Follow Procedure
.WhichONEofthefollowing
manual transfer only.
describestheproperloading
(
sequence and associated
250V Battery
equipment?
Normal Source
A.II28RHRand 28CoreSpraypumpsstartat7secondsafterthe
Alternate Source
accidentsignalisreceived
Charaer
.B.RHRSWpumpslinedupfor
(Charger Service bus)
EECWstartat14secondsafterthe
1
accidentsignalisreceived
480V SD Bd 1A
.c.CoreSpraypumps(2A
480V Common Bd 1
, 28 ,2C,2D)start
Comp 6D
immediatelywhenvoltageis
Comp 3A
availableontherespectiveshutdownboard
2A
.D.2CRHRand2CCoreSpraypumpsstartat7
480V SD Bd 2A
secondsafterthe accidentsignalisreceived
480V Common Bd 1
.KIA Statement:264000EDGs
Comp6D
K5.06-Knowledgeofthe
Comp 3A
operational
2B
implicationsofthefollowing
480V SD Bd 2B
conceptsastheyapplyto
480V Common Bd 1
EMERGENCY GENERATORS (DIESEUJET):
Comp6D
Load sequenc ing KIA Justification:Thisquestion
Comp 3A
satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
3
candidatetousespecificplantconditionsandtimesto
480V SD Bd 3A
correctly determine the effectof.load sequencingonplant equipmentsuppliedbythe
480V Common Bd 1
Emergency Generators
Comp 6D
.References:
Comp3A
Level of Knowledge Justification:
Obj. V.B.2
Th isquestionisratedas
Obj. V.C.2
CIAduetothe requirementtoassemble, sort ,andintegratethepartsofthequestiontopredictan
Obj V.D.2
outcome.This requires mentallyusingthisknowledgeanditsmeaningto
 
predict the correct outcome.0610NRCExam
(
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
4
Analysis: (Inordertoanswerthisquestioncorrectlythecandidatemust
5
determinethefollowing
480V SO Bd 3B
:1.LoadSequencingisNVA(NormalVoltageAvailable)andNOTDGVA (DIGVoltageAvailable).
Com
2.BasedonItem1above, theproperloadsequencingwithaCommon
60
AccidentSignal(CAS)onUnit-2aloneandNOTinadditiontoaCASonUnit1.Ais correct.Bis incorrect.Thisisplus
480V Com Bd 1
iblebecauseRHRSWpumpsallstartat14
Com
secondsifloadsequencingis
5C
DGVA.Cis incorrect.ThisisplausiblebasedonLoadSequencinglogicpriortoamodificationforUnit1restart
480V Common Bd 1
activities.Dis incorrect.Thisisplausiblebecause2-01-74P&L3.2.Bdefinesthestarttimeas7second"intervals".(  
Com
(b.(2)Opensdieseloutputbreakersifshut.Ifnormalvoltageisavailable,loadwillsequenceonasfollows:(NVA)
3A
OPL171.038Revision16Page38 of63 INSTRUCTOR
(no alternate)
NOTES ou.v.s.s ou.v.c.e Obj.v.D.15 oejv.s.15 Time After Accident SID Board SID Board SID Board SID Board A C B D , 0-RHR/GS-A_l 7RHR/CSB 14RHR/CSC 21RHR/CSD 28 RHRSW RHRSW RHRSW*RHRSW*RHRSWpumpsassigned
OPL171.037
for.EECWautomaticstart
Revision 10
c.If ormal voltage is NeT-available: (DGVA)(1)After5-secondtimedelay, all4kVShutdownBoardloadsexcept
Page 12 of 70
4160/480Vtransformerbreakersareautomaticallytripped.(2)Dieselgeneratoroutputbreakercloseswhendieselisatspeed.
6
ouv.e.s ouv.c.e c.(3)Loadssequenceasindicatedbelow
480~o~or;gd 3
Time After Accident SID Board SID Board SID Board SID Board A B C D 0RHRARHRCRHRBRHRD 7 CSACSCCSBCSD 14 RHRSW*RHRSW*RHRSW*RHRSW**RHRSWpumpsassignedforEECWautomaticstartd.Certain480Vloadsareshedwheneveranaccidentsignalisreceivedinconjunctionwiththedieselgeneratortiedtotheboard.(seeOPL171.072)
(no alternate)
((BFN Residual Heat Removal System 2-01-74 Unit 2Rev.0133Page17 of 3673.2LPCI (continued)
2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four
B.Uponan automaticLPCIinitiationwithnormal
feeders. Three DC outputs can be connected to battery board 1,
power available, RFiR P-umpstartsimme
2, or 3. The fourth output is connected to a new output transfer
aiately.and2B,2C,2D
switch (located in battery board room 4) which charges batteries
sequentially
4, 5, or 6 plant batteries. A meclianical interlocKpermits closing
startat7 second intervals.
only: one output feeaer at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery
Otherwise,allRHRpumps
board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock is used in battery board
start immediately
room 4
once diesel powerisavailable(andnormal
TP-2 & TP-7
power unavailable).
Attention to Detail
C.Manually stoppinganRHRpumpafterLPCI
 
initiation
(
disables automatic restartofthatpumpuntilthe
XI.
initiationsignalisreset.The
Summary
affectedRHRpumpcanstillbestarted manually.3.3 Shutdown CoolingA.Priorto initiating
We have discussed in detail the DC Power Systems at BFN.
ShutdownCooling,RHRshouldbe
The electrical design and operation which makes these
flushed to Radwaste until conductivityislessthan2.0
systems so reliable has been explained. The various systems
micromho/cmwithlessthan0.1ppmchlorides (unless directed otherwise by 2-AOI-74-1, Loss of Shutdown Cooling).IfCS&Shasbeen alignedasthekeepfillsourcefortwo
have been described with reference to function, components,
daysormorea chemistry sampleshouldbe requestedandresults
locations, and electrical loads. Power sources have been
analyzed to determineifflushingis
identified, and instrumentation has been noted. Significant
required.B.Whenin Shutdown Cooling, reactor temperature
control and alarm aspects have also been pointed out.
should be maintained
OPL171.037
greater than 72&deg;Fandonlybe controlledbythrottling
Revision 10
RHRSWflow.Thisistoassure
Page 31 of 70
adequatemixingof reactor water.1.[NER/C]Reactor vessel water temperatures
250V Battery Charger
below 68&deg;Fexceedthe temperature
Normal Source
reactivity
Alternate Source
assumedinthe criticality
(Charger Service bus)
analysis.[INPOSER90-017]
1
2.[NER/C]Maintaining
480V SO Bd 1A, Comp 60
water temperature
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
below 100&deg;F minimizesthereleaseof
2A
soluble activity.[GESIL541]
480V SO Bd 2A Comp 60
C.Shutdown Cooling operation at saturated conditions
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
(212&deg;F)with2RHRpumps
2B
operatingator near combinedmaximumflow
480V SO Bd 2B, Comp 60
(20,000gpm)couldcauseJet
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
Pump Cavitation.
3
IndicationsofJetPump Cavitationareasfollows:1.RiseinRHR
480V SO Bd 3A, Comp 60
System flow without a correspondingrisein JetPumpflow.2.FluctuationofJetPumpflow.
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
3.Louder"Rumbling"noiseheardwhenvesselheadisoff.
4
Correctiveactionforanyofthese
480V SO Bd 3B, Comp 60
symptoms wouldbetoreduceRHRflowuntil
480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A
the symptom is corrected.  
5
(23.RO 300000K2.02 001/MEM/T2Gl/CAI1300000K2.02/
480V Com Bd 1 Comp 5C
2.8/2.8/RO/SR0/1l/16/07
(no alternate)
RMSWhichONEofthefollow
6
ing describesthepowersuppliestotheControlandServiceAir
480V Com Bd 3 Comp 3D
Compressor
(no alternate)
motors?A."A"and"8"arefedfromthe480VCommon8d.#1"C"and"0" from 480VSID8d.18&28 , respectively"G"from4KV
The 2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four feeders. Three DC outputs
SID 8d.8and480SO8d
can be connected to battery board 1, 2, or 3. The fourth DC output is connected to output
.2A"E"fromthe
transfer switch (BBR 4) to batteries 4, 5, or 6. Mechanical interlock permits closing only one
480VCommon8d.#1 B."A"and"0" from 480V Common 8d.1"8"and"C"from
output feeder at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock
480VSID8d.18&28,respectively"G"from 4KV SID 8d.8and 480VRMOV8d.2A"F"from 480V Common8d.#3 C."A"from 480V SID 8d.18"8"and"F"from 480VCommon8d.#3"C"from 480V SID 8d.1A"0" from 480V SID 8d.2A"G"from4KV
is used in battery board room 4.)
Common 8d.#2 0.01"A"from 480V SID 8d.18"8"and"C"from
250V DC battery chargers 1, 2A and 2B will load shed upon receipt of a Unit 1 or Unit 2
480V Common 8d.#1"0" from 480V SID 8d.2A"G"from 4KV SID8d.8and 480V RMOV 8d.2A"E"from 480V Common8d.#3 KJA Statement:
accident signal and any Unit 1/2 shutdown board being supplied by its respective diesel
300000 Instrument
generator or cross tied to a Unit 3 shutdown board and a unit three Diesel Generator. 250
Air.K2.02-Knowledgeof
VDC Battery Charger 3 will load shed on a unit 3 load shed signal.
electrical
e oad shedding feature
powersuppliestothefollowing
can be b~ssed by. placing the "Emergency" switCii on the charger. to tfie "EMERG" P.Qsition.
: Emergency a ir compressor
Station Battery charger 4 does not have load shed logic; however, battery charger 4 will
KJA Justification
deenergize when 3B 480 SID Board deenergizes and will return when the 480V SID Board
: This question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
voltage returns.
candidatetousespecificknowledgeofthe
They also supply alternate control power for Units 1 and 2 4kV Shutdown Boards; however, on
powersuppliesofALLair
Unit 3, the A, C, and 0 4kV Shutdown Boards receive both normal and alternate control power
compressors.
from the 250V DC Unit Systems. (3EB receives alternate control power only.) The 250V DC
References
RMOV Boards are supplied from the Unit Battery Board as follows:
: Level of Knowledge Justification:ThisquestionisratedasMEMduetothe
BB-1 supplies 250V RMOV Boards 1A, 2C, 3B.
requirementtorecallorrecognized
BB-2 supplies 250V RMOV Bds 2A, 1C, 3C.
iscrete b its of informat ion.0610NRCExam
 
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
OPL171.037
Analysis: (In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
Revision 10
1.Power suppliestosix air compressors
Page 47 of70
.NOTE: Regarding plausibility,allthe power supplieslistedinthe
(
distractors
-
are capable of supplying power to each air compressor
=
.Aisincorrect.
:=
B ,G&Eare correct.A,C&Dare incorrect.Bis incorrect.
:=
F&G are correct.A,B,C,&Dare incorrect.Cis incorrect.
..=.
A, D&Fare correct.B,C&Gare incorrectDiscorrect.
-
((X.LessonBodyA.ControlAir
-
System1.**The purposeoftheControlAirSystemisto
-
process and distribute
480vSO BO 1A
oil-freecontrolair,driedtoalow
NOR
dew pointandfree of foreign materials.
............
This high-qualityairis required throughouttheplantandyardto
BATTERY
ensure the proper functioning
CHARGER
of pneumatically
No.1
operated instruments, valves ,andfinal operators.2.Basic DescriptionofFlowPatha.The station controlairsystemhas5air
ALT
compressors, each designed for continuous
............
operation.
480v SO B02A
b.Common header(fedbyair compressors
............
A-DandG)(1)The control air system is normally alignedwiththeGair compressorrunningandloaded.The
BATTERY
existing A-D air compressors
CHARGER
are alignedwithone in second lead ,oneinthirdlead,andat
No.2A
least one compressor
ALT
in standby.(2)3 control air receivers(3)4dual dryersOneforeachunit's
.............
control air header(units1,2&3
480v SO BO 2B
through their 4-inch headers)andOne standby dryer supplies the standby ,3-inchcommoncontrolair
NOR
header for all three units (4)Outletfromlarge service air receiver is connectedtothe control air receiversthrougha pressure control valve 0-FCV-33-1,whichwill automaticallyopento supply serviceairtothe control air header if control air pressurefallsto85psig
............
.c.4-inch control air header(1perunit)is
BATTERY
supplied fromeachunit dryerandbackedupbyacommon,3-inch
~
standby header.3.ControlAir
CHARGER
System Component Description
en
a.Four Reciprocating
No.2B
Air Compressors
0:w
A-D (2-stage, double acting, V-type)arelocatedEI565,U-1
u..
Turbine Building.(1)Supplyairtothecontrolair
ALT
receiversat610scfmeachata normal operating pressureof90-101 psig.(2)480V,60Hz, 3-phase, drive motors (3)Power suppliesAfrom 480V Shutdown Board1BOPL171.054Revision12Page9of72**SOER 88-1 Obj.V.E.1 TP-1 Obj.V.E.3Obj.V.D.1TheGair compressorwillbe discussedlaterinthissectionofthelesson
enz
plan.normallyalignedtoall
1************-
three units TP-1  
~I-
(o from 480V ShutdownBoard2ABfrom 480V CommonBoard1Cfrom 480V CommonBoard1 (a)Control air compressorswhichare poweredfromthe480VAC
480v SO B03A
shutdown boards are tripped automaticallydueto: i.under voltageonthe shutdown board.ii.loadshedlogicduringan
~
accident signal concurrentwithaloss of offsite power.NOTE: The compressors
0..
must be restarted manually after power is restoredtotheboard.(b)Units powered from common boardsalsotripdueto under voltage.(4)Lubrication
I-
provided from attached oil system via gear-typeoilpump (a)Compressortripsonlubeoil pressure<10psig orlubeoil temperature
NOR
>180 of (b)Compressor
;:)
cylinderisanon lubricated
,.-------.---i
type (5)Cooling waterisfromtheRaw
0
Cooling Water system with backup from EECW (a)Compressoroilcooler, compressorcooler, after cooler and cylinder water jackets (b)Compressor
I
inter-cooler
aJ
and after cooler moisture traps drain moisture to theUnit1 station sump.NOTE: Cooling waterflowstothe
:
compressors
BATTERY
are regulated such that the RCW outlet temperature
:
is maintained
N
between70&deg;Fand100&deg;F.
CHARGER
Outlet temperatures
*
should be adjustedlowintheband(high
0
flow rates)during warm seasons (river temps.70&deg;F).Outlet temperatures
*
should be adjustedhighintheband
I-
during the cooler seasons (river temps70&deg;F)to reduce condensationinthe cylinders.(c)Compressorautotripsif
:
discharge temperature
No.3
of air>310&deg;F.b.Unloaders OPL171.054Revision12Page10of72
**
Obj.V.B.1.Obj.V.C.1.Obj.V.B.2.Obj.V.C.2.Obj.V.E.12 Obj.V.D.10Obj.V.B.2.Obj.V.C.2.Obj.V.E.12Obj.V.D.10  
ALT
((b)Shouldboththe primaryandthe backup controllersfail,all four compressors
:
will comeonlineatfullloaduntil
............;
these pressure switches cause the compressors
480v SO BO 3B
to unload at112psig.(c)When air pressure drops belowthehigh pressure cutoff setpoint (110.8psig),the compressorswillagain comeonlineatfullloaduntilthehigh
NOR
pressure cutoff switches cause the compressors
BATTERY
to unload.d.Relief valvesonthe compressors
CHARGER t--------+-----+--+----i--+---;--i----+---+-____
discharge set at120psig protects the compressor
NO.4
and piping.e.G Air Compressor
1-----' ALT
-centrifugaltype,two stage (1)Located 565'EL Turbine Bldg.,Unit1end.Control Air Compressor
BATT
Gisthe primary control air compressor
BO 1
and provides most of the control air needed for normal plant operation.(2)Ratedat
BATT
1440 SCFM@105psig.(3)Power Supply (a)4 kV Shutdown Board B supplies power to the compressor
B02
motor.(b)480 V RMOV Bd.2A Supplies the following:*Prelubepump*Oil reservoir heater*Cooling water pumps*Panel(s)control power*Auto Restart circuit (c)Except for short power interruptionsonthe 480v RMOV Bd, Loss of either of these two power supplies will resultina shutdown of the G air compressor.(4)A complete descriptionoftheG Air compressor
BATT
controls and indicationscanbe found in 0-01-32.(TheGandtheFair
B03
compressor
BATT
indicat ions and Microcontrollers
B04
are similar).(a)UNLOAD MODULATE AUTO DUAL handswitchisusedto select the mode of operation for the compressor
480v
OPL 171.054Revision12Page14of72
COMMON
Cutout switch setpointsaresetat112psigto
BO 1
prevent spurious operat ionwhenGair compressor
..............._..
running Cover 01 illustrations
..................
TP-8  
TP-2
3.Component Description
250V DC Power Distribution
a.CompressorsEandF(EL565,U-3
 
Turbine Building)are designatedforserviceair.b.TheFair compressorisratedfor
(
approximately
(
630 SCFM@105psig,centrifugaltype,2stagesc.The powersupplyforboth
22. RO 264000K5.06 00 l/C/A/T2Gl/82 - DG/9/264000K5.06//RO/SRO/
compressors
Given the following plant conditions:
is 480VAC Common Board 3.d.FIG air compressor
*
comparison
Unit 2 is operating at Full Power.
(1)ControlsaresimilartothatoftheGair
*
compressor.Thereisno4KV
No Equipment is Out of Service.
breakercontrolontheFair compressorcontrolpanel.(2)Controlsystemmodulates
*
discharge air pressureinthesame mannerasisdoneontheGair
A large leak occurs in the drywell and the following conditions exist:
compressor
- Drywell Pressure peaked at 28 psig and is currently at 20 psig.
.(3)Airsystemis similartotheGair compressor.
- Reactor Pressure is at 110 psig.
A differenceisthatthe2stagesof
- Reactor Water Level is at -120 inches
compression
- Offsite power is available.
aredrivenbyoneshaftfortheFair
Which ONE of the following describes the proper loading sequence and associated equipment?
A. II 28 RHR and 28 Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.
B.
RHRSW pumps lined up for EECW start at 14 seconds after the accident signal is received.
c.
Core Spray pumps (2A, 28, 2C, 2D) start immediately when voltage is available on the respective
shutdown board.
D.
2C RHR and 2C Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.
KIA Statement:
264000 EDGs
K5.06 - Knowledge of the operational implications of the following concepts as they apply to
EMERGENCY GENERATORS (DIESEUJET): Load sequencing
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions and times to correctly determine the effect of.load sequencing on plant equipment
supplied by the Emergency Generators.
References:
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam
 
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
(
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Load Sequencing is NVA (Normal Voltage Available) and NOT DGVA (DIG Voltage Available).
2. Based on Item 1 above, theproper load sequencing with a Common Accident Signal (CAS) on Unit-2
alone and NOT in addition to a CAS on Unit 1.
A is correct.
B is incorrect. This is plusible because RHRSW pumps all start at 14 seconds if load sequencing is
DGVA.
C is incorrect. This is plausible based on Load Sequencing logic prior to a modification for Unit 1 restart
activities.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because 2-01-74 P&L 3.2.B defines the start time as 7 second
"intervals".
(
 
(
b.
(2)
Opens diesel output breakers if shut.
If normal voltage is available, load will
sequence on as follows: (NVA)
OPL171.038
Revision 16
Page 38 of63
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
ou.v.s.s
ou.v.c.e
Obj.v.D.15
oejv.s. 15
Time After Accident
SID Board
SID Board
SID Board
SID Board
A
C
B
D
, 0-
RHR/GS-A_ l
7
RHR/CS B
14
RHR/CS C
21
RHR/CS D
28
RHRSW
RHRSW
RHRSW*
RHRSW
*RHRSW pumps assigned for. EECW automatic start
c.
If
ormal voltage is NeT-available: (DGVA)
(1)
After 5-second time delay, all4kV
Shutdown Board loads except
4160/480V transformer breakers are
automatically tripped.
(2)
Diesel generator output breaker closes
when diesel is at speed.
ouv.e.s
ouv.c.e
c.
(3)
Loads sequence as indicated below
Time After Accident
SID Board
SID Board
SID Board
SID Board
A
B
C
D
0
RHR A
RHR C
RHR B
RHR D
7
CSA
CS C
CS B
CS D
14
RHRSW*
RHRSW*
RHRSW*
RHRSW*
*RHRSW pumps assigned for EECW automatic start
d.
Certain 480V loads are shed whenever an
accident signal is received in conjunction with
the diesel generator tied to the board. (see
OPL171.072)
 
(
(
BFN
Residual Heat Removal System
2-01-74
Unit 2
Rev. 0133
Page 17 of 367
3.2
LPCI (continued)
B.
Upon an automatic LPCI initiation with normal power available, RFiR P-ump 2~
starts immeaiately. and 2B, 2C, 2D sequentially start at 7 second intervals.
Otherwise, all RHR pumps start immediately once diesel power is available
(and normal power unavailable).
C.
Manually stopping an RHR pump after LPCI initiation disables automatic restart
of that pump until the initiation signal is reset. The affected RHR pump can still
be started manually.
3.3
Shutdown Cooling
A.
Prior to initiating Shutdown Cooling, RHR should be flushed to Radwaste until
conductivity is less than 2.0 micromho/cm with less than 0.1 ppm chlorides
(unless directed otherwise by 2-AOI-74-1, Loss of Shutdown Cooling). If CS&S
has been aligned as the keep fill source for two days or more a chemistry
sample should be requested and results analyzed to determine if flushing is
required.
B.
When in Shutdown Cooling, reactor temperature should be maintained greater
than 72&deg;F and only be controlled by throttling RHRSW flow. This is to assure
adequate mixing of reactor water.
1.
[NER/C] Reactor vessel water temperatures below 68&deg;F exceed the
temperature reactivity assumed in the criticality analysis.
[INPO SER 90-017]
2.
[NER/C] Maintaining water temperature below 100&deg;F minimizes the release of
soluble activity.
[GE SIL 541]
C.
Shutdown Cooling operation at saturated conditions (212&deg;F) with 2 RHR pumps
operating at or near combined maximum flow (20,000 gpm) could cause Jet
Pump Cavitation. Indications of Jet Pump Cavitation are as follows:
1.
Rise in RHR System flow without a corresponding rise in Jet Pump flow.
2.
Fluctuation of Jet Pump flow.
3.
Louder "Rumbling" noise heard when vessel head is off.
Corrective action for any of these symptoms would be to reduce RHR flow until
the symptom is corrected.
 
(
23. RO 300000K2.02 001/MEM/T2Gl/CAI1300000K2.02/2.8/2.8/RO/SR0/1l/16/07 RMS
Which ONE of the follow ing describes the power supplies to the Control and Service Air Compressor
motors?
A.
"A" and "8" are fed from the 480V Common 8d. #1
"C" and "0" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28 , respectively
"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480 SO 8d. 2A
"E" from the 480V Common 8d. #1
B.
"A" and "0" from 480V Common 8d . 1
"8" and "C" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28, respectively
"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A
"F" from 480V Common 8d. #3
C.
"A" from 480V SID 8d. 18
"8" and "F" from 480V Common 8d. #3
"C" from 480V SID 8d. 1A
"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A
"G" from 4KV Common 8d.#2
0. 01 "A" from 480V SID 8d. 18
"8" and "C" from 480V Common 8d . #1
"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A
"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A
"E" from 480V Common 8d. #3
KJA Statement:
300000 Instrument Air
.
K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Emergency air compressor
KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of the power supplies of ALL air compressors.
References:
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
 
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
(
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Power supplies to six air compressors.
NOTE: Regarding plausibility, all the power supplies listed in the distractors are capable of supplying
power to each air compressor.
A is incorrect. B, G & E are correct. A, C & D are incorrect.
B is incorrect. F & G are correct. A, B, C, & D are incorrect.
C is incorrect. A, D & F are correct. B, C &G are incorrect
D is correct.
 
(
(
X. Lesson Body
A. Control Air System
1. **The purpose of the Control Air System is to process
and distribute oil-free control air, dried to a low dew point
and free of foreign materials. This high-quality air is
required throughout the plant and yard to ensure the
proper functioning of pneumatically operated
instruments, valves, and final operators.
2. Basic Description of Flow Path
a. The station control air system has 5 air compressors,
each designed for continuous operation.
b. Common header (fed by air compressors A-D and G)
(1) The control air system is normally aligned with the
G air compressor running and loaded. The
existing A-D air compressors are aligned with one
in second lead , one in third lead, and at least one
compressor in standby.
(2) 3 control air receivers
(3) 4 dual dryers One for each unit's control air
header (units 1, 2 & 3 through their 4-inch
headers) and One standby dryer supplies the
standby, 3- inch common control air header for all
three units
(4) Outlet from large service air receiver is connected
to the control air receivers through a pressure
control valve 0-FCV-33-1, which will automatically
open to supply service air to the control air
header if control air pressure falls to 85 psig.
c. 4-inch control air header (1 per unit) is supplied from
each unit dryer and backed up by a common, 3-inch
standby header.
3. Control Air System Component Description
a. Four Reciprocating Air Compressors A-D (2-stage,
double acting, V-type) are located EI 565, U-1
Turbine Building.
(1) Supply air to the control air receivers at 610 scfm
each at a normal operating pressure of 90 - 101
psig.
(2) 480V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, drive motors
(3) Power supplies
A from 480V Shutdown Board 1B
OPL171.054
Revision 12
Page 9 of 72
** SOER 88-1
Obj. V.E.1
TP-1
Obj. V.E.3
Obj. V.D.1
The G air compressor
will be discussed later in
this section of the lesson
plan.
normally aligned to all
three units
TP-1
 
(
o from 480V Shutdown Board 2A
B from 480V Common Board 1
C from 480V Common Board 1
(a) Control air compressors which are powered
from the 480 VAC shutdown boards are
tripped automatically due to:
i.
under voltage on the shutdown board.
ii.
load shed logic during an accident signal
concurrent with a loss of offsite power.
NOTE: The compressors must be
restarted manually after power is restored
to the board.
(b) Units powered from common boards also trip
due to under voltage.
(4) Lubrication provided from attached oil system via
gear-type oil pump
(a) Compressor trips on
lube oil pressure < 10 psig
or
lube oil temperature >180 of
(b) Compressor cylinder is a non lubricated type
(5) Cooling water is from the Raw Cooling Water
system with backup from EECW
(a) Compressor oil cooler, compressor inter-
cooler, after cooler and cylinder water jackets
(b) Compressor inter-cooler and after cooler
moisture traps drain moisture to the Unit 1
station sump .
NOTE: Cooling water flows to the compressors are regulated
such that the RCW outlet temperature is maintained
between 70&deg; F and 100&deg; F. Outlet temperatures
should be adjusted low in the band (high flow rates)
during warm seasons (river temps. ~ 70&deg;F). Outlet
temperatures should be adjusted high in the band
during the cooler seasons (river temps ~ 70&deg;F) to
reduce condensation in the cylinders.
(c) Compressor auto trips if discharge
temperature of air> 310&deg; F.
b. Unloaders
OPL171 .054
Revision 12
Page 10 of 72
Obj. V.B.1.
Obj. V.C.1.
Obj. V.B.2.
Obj. V.C.2.
Obj. V.E.12
Obj. V.D.10
Obj. V.B.2.
Obj. V.C.2.
Obj. V.E.12
Obj. V.D .10
 
(
(b) Should both the primary and the backup
controllers fail, all four compressors will come
on line at full load until these pressure
switches cause the compressors to unload at
112 psig.
(c) When air pressure drops below the high
pressure cutoff setpoint (110.8 psig), the
compressors will again come on line at full
load until the high pressure cutoff switches
cause the compressors to unload.
d. Relief valves on the compressors discharge set at
120 psig protects the compressor and piping.
e. G Air Compressor - centrifugal type, two stage
(1) Located 565' EL Turbine Bldg. , Unit 1 end.
Control Air Compressor G is the primary control
air compressor and provides most of the control
air needed for normal plant operation.
(2) Rated at 1440 SCFM @ 105 psig.
(3) Power Supply
(a) 4 kV Shutdown Board B supplies power to
the compressor motor.
(b) 480 V RMOV Bd. 2A Supplies the following :
*
Pre lube pump
*
Oil reservoir heater
*
Cooling water pumps
*
Panel(s) control power
*
Auto Restart circuit
(c) Except for short power interruptions on the
480v RMOV Bd, Loss of either of these two
power supplies will result in a shutdown of the
G air compressor.
(4) A complete description of the G Air compressor
controls and indications can be found in 0-01-32.
(The G and the F air compressor indications and
Microcontrollers are similar).
(a) UNLOAD MODULATE AUTO DUAL
handswitch is used to select the mode of
operation for the compressor
OPL171.054
Revision 12
Page 14 of 72
Cutout switch setpoints
are set at 112 psig to
prevent spurious
operation when G air
compressor running
Cover 01 illustrations
TP-8
 
3. Component Description
a. Compressors E and F (EL 565, U-3 Turbine Building)
are designated for service air.
b. The F air compressor is rated for approximately 630
SCFM @ 105 psig, centrifugal type, 2 stages
c. The power supply for both compressors is 480VAC
Common Board 3.
d. FIG air compressor comparison
(1) Controls are similar to that of the G air
compressor. There is no 4KV breaker control on
the F air compressor control panel.
(2) Control system modulates discharge air pressure
in the same manner as is done on the G air
compressor.
compressor.
OntheGaircompressor,thereisa
(3) Air system is similar to the G air compressor. A
separate drives;oneforeachof3
difference is that the 2 stages of compression are
compression
driven by one shaft for the F air compressor. On
stages.(4)Oilsystem
the G air compressor, there is a separate drives;
similartothatontheGair
one for each of 3 compression stages.
compressor
(4) Oil system similar to that on the G air compressor
with exceptionoflocationof
with exception of location of components and
components
capacity. E compressor has an electric oil pump
andcapacity.E
that runs whenever control power is on.
compressorhasan electricoilpumpthatruns whenevercontrolpowerison.(5)CoolingsystemissimilartothatontheGair
(5) Cooling system is similar to that on the G air
compressorwithexceptionofflowrate,location, and capacityofcomponents.(6)Lossof powerwillresultinFair
compressor with exception of flow rate, location,
compressor
and capacity of components.
trip ,lossoftheprelubepump,andthecooling
(6) Loss of power will result in F air compressor trip,
water pumps.(7)Restartofthe compressorcanbe accomplishedoncethe compressorhascometoafullstopandanytrip conditionsclearedandreset.
loss of the pre lube pump, and the cooling water
e.AlarmslTrips(1)The AlertandShutdown
pumps .
setpointsforthe Fair compressorarelistedin0-01-33.OPL171.054Revision12Page30of72
(7) Restart of the compressor can be accomplished
Obj.V.E.6 Obj.V.DA TP-16 ouv.s.rObj.V.D.5Settocontrolatapprox.95psig-ReliefValveissettoliftat
once the compressor has come to a full stop and
.115psig.TP-17 TP-18 TP-19Seeforlatestsetpoints
any trip conditions cleared and reset.
(24.RO 300000K3.0100
e. AlarmslTrips
lIel A/T2G lISGT/B 1 OB/300000K3.0 113.2/3A/RO/SRO/ll/l6/07
(1) The Alert and Shutdown setpoints for the Fair
RMSALOCAhas occurredonUnit1andthedrywellisbeingventedtoSBGT,whenalossoftheControlAirsystemoccurs
compressor are listed in 0-01-33.
.WhichONEof
OPL171.054
thefo llowing descr ibestheoperatio
Revision 12
nofventva lves 1-FCV-64-29
Page 30 of 72
, DRYWELLVENTINBDISOLVALVEand
Obj. V.E.6
1-FCV-84-19,PATHB VENT FLOW CONT?A.Bothventvalves1-FCV-64-29
Obj. V.DA
&1-FCV-84-19willfailcloseandcannotbeoperated
TP-16
.8.Bothventvalves
ouv.s.r
1-FCV-64-29
Obj. V.D.5
&1-FCV-84-19willautoswaptocontrolfromtheCADsupplylinewithno operatoractionrequ
Set to control at approx.
ired.C.oIBothventvalves
95 psig - Relief Valve is
1-FCV-64-29
set to lift at.~ 115 psig.
&1-FCV-84-19willautoswaptocontrolfromtheCADsupplyl
TP-17
ine , howeverCADsupplymustbe
TP-18
manuallyalignedfromthecontrolroom
TP-19
.D.TheCAD systemmustbe manuallyinitiatedandthenventvalves
See for latest setpoints
1-FCV-64-29
 
&1-FCV-84-19
(
mayberealignedtotheCADsupply
24. RO 300000K3.01 00 lIelA/T2G lISGT/B 1OB/300000K3.0113.2/3A/RO/SRO/l l/l 6/07 RMS
.KIA Statement:
A LOCA has occurred on Unit 1 and the drywell is being vented to SBGT, when a loss of the Control Air
300000 Instrument
system occurs.
Air K3.01-Knowledgeofthe
Which ONE of the following describes the operation of vent valves 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD
effectthatalossor
ISOL VALVE and 1-FCV-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT?
malfunct ionofthe (INSTRUMENT
A.
AIR SYSTEM)willhaveonthefollow
Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will fail close and can not be operated .
ing: Conta inment air system KIA Justification:Thisquestion
8.
satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequir ing the candidatetousespecificplantconditionsto
Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line
determine the effectontheconta
with no operator action required.
inment a irsystemduetoalossofControlAir.
C.oI Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line,
however CAD supply must be manually aligned from the control room.
D.
The CAD system must be manually initiated and then vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 may
be realigned to the CAD supply.
KIA Statement:
300000 Instrument Air
K3.01 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the
(INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM) will have
on the following: Containment air system
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the effect on the containment air system due to a loss of Control Air.
References: 1-EOI Appendicies 8G and 12, 1-AOI-32-2
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
1. Whether the vent valves automatically swap to be supplied by CAD or must be manually aligned.
2. Whether CAD supply to DW Control Air automatically swaps or must be manually aligned.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves DO fail closed, however, they can be operated
with manual alignment of the CAD Tanks.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves will auto swap to control from the CAD supply
line, however the CAD tanks must be manually aligned.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible becase the CAD system must be manually initiated, however once this is
accomplished, no further alignment is necessary.
 
(
BFN
1*EOI APPENDIX*12
UNIT 1
PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING
Rev. 0
Page 4 ofa
f.
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
approximately 100 scfm.
g.
CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.
10.
VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, as
follows:
a.
VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141 , DRYWELL DP COMP
BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).
b.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT
ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).
c.
VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL
VALVE (Panel 1-9-54).
d.
PLACE 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO
with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).
e.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-19, 1-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in
OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).
f.
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
approximately 100 scfm.
g.
CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.
11.
VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as
follows:
a.
VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP
BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).
b.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR I DWVENT
ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).
c.
VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBD ISOL VALVE
(Panel 1-9-54).
d.
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO
with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).
e.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-20, 1-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION
BYPASS, in BYPASS (Panel 1-9-55).
f.
VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating
approximately 100 scfm.
 
(
1-EOI APPENDIX-12
Rev. 0
BFN
PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING
Page 7 of 8
UNIT 1
AITACHMENT 1
...J
...J
~o
3:
0
ws
en
2"
It:
I-
W
o
&,
64-34
>
en
.....
0
0
~
~
I-
c>>
A-
N
N
:E
....
0
'?
W
eo
-e
.....
eo
en>-
-
en
I
.....z
I
w>
'---
~
'"
0
0
'"
'?
0
....
-e
eo
eo
9&#xa3;-\\79
~
en
we::
ClW
e::~i
~-
Q.u.
...Jo
o
...JZ
o
w<
0
~en
gz
...J en
>-z
alO
al z
e::<
e::i=1-
e::<
Ou.
Ou.
o~en
1-1-
I
I-_~
tl en
tll-<
i5~
i5 Z J:
wx
e::~ <;
e::>w
ox
I-W
 
(
BFN
CROSSTIE CAD TO
1-EOI APPENDIX-8G
UNIT 1
DRYWELL CONTROL AIR
Rev. 0
Page 1 of 2
LOCATION:
Unit 1 Control Room
ATTACHMENTS:
None
1.
OPEN the following valves:
*
0-FCV-84-5, CAD A TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE
(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-54)
*
0-FCV-84-16, CAD B TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE
(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-55).
2.
VERIFY 0-PI-84-6, VAPOR A OUTLET PRESS, and 0-PI-84-17,
VAPOR B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100 psig
Panel 1-9-54 and Panel 1-9-55).
3.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW
CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-54).
4.
CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL
AIR, (Panel 1-9-54).
5.
PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW
CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).
6.
CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL
AIR (Panel 1-9-55).
7.
CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,
1-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18).
8.
IF
MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,
1-PA-32-31, annunciator is or remains in alarm
(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18),
THEN
DETERMINE which Drywell Control Air header is
depressurized as follows:
a.
DISPATCH personnel to Unit 1, RB, EI 565 ft, to MONITOR the
following indications for low pressure:
*
1-PI-084-0051, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS
indicator, for CAD A (RB, EI. 565, by Drywell Access
Door),
*
1-PI-084-0050, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS
indicator, for CAD B (RB, EI. 565, left side of 480V RB
Vent Board 1B).
(~
 
(
BFN
Loss Of Control Air
1-AOI-32-2
Unit 1
Rev. 0001
Page 5 of 27
2.0
SYMPTOMS (continued)
*
REACTOR CHANNEL A(B) AUTO SCRAM annunciator, (1-XA-55-5B,
Window 1(2)) in alarm.
*
MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW annunciator,
(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18) in alarm.
3.0
AUTOMATIC ACTIONS
A.
U-1 TO U-2 CONT AIR CROSSTIE, 1-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE to separate
Units 1 & 2 when control Air Header Control Air Header pressure reaches
65 psig lowering at the valve.
B.
UNIT 2 TO UNIT 3 CONTROL AIR CROSSTIE, 2-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE
to separate Units 2 and 3 when Control Air Header pressure reaches 65 psig
lowering at the valve.
C.
CAD SUPPLY PRESS REGULATOR, 1-PCV-084-0706, will select nitrogen
from CAD Tank A at s 75 psig Control Air pressure to supply the following:
1.
SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0020
2.
SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0021
D.
INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0033, will select nitrogen from CAD
Tank A to supply the following:
1.
DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,
1-FSV-084-0019
2.
DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0029
3.
SUPPR CHMBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0032
E.
INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0034, will select nitrogen from CAD
Tank B to supply the following:
1.
DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,
1-FSV-084-0020
2.
DRYWELL INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0031
3.
SUPPR CHBR INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0034.
 
(
BFN
Loss Of Control Air
1-AOI-32-2
Unit 1
Rev. 0001
Page 7 of 27
4.2
Subsequent Actions (continued)
NOTE
CNDS BSTR PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1C, 1-FCV-002-0029A and CNDS BSTR
PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1B, 1-FCV-002-0029B both fail CLOSED on a loss of
control air.
[3]
IF there is NOT a flow path for Condensate system, THEN
STOP the Condensate Pumps and Condensate Booster
Pumps. REFER TO 1-01-2.
[4]
IF any Outboard MSIV closes, THEN
PLACE the associated handswitch on Panel 1-9-3 in the
CLOSE position.
NOTE
RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION, 0-FCV-25-32, fails CLOSED on loss of control air.
o
o
[5]
START a High Pressure Fire Pump. REFER TO 0-01-26.
0
[6]
OPEN CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-5, at
Panel 1-9-54.
0
[7]
OPEN CAD SYSTEM B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-16,
at Panel 1-9-55.
0
[8]
CHECK RCW pump motor amps and PERFORM Steps
4.2[8.1] through 4.2[8.5]to reduce RCW flow:
 
(
25. RO 400000A2.02 OO l/C/A/T2G I/RBCCW//400000A2 .02/3.8/4.I/RO/SRO/ll/l6/07 RMS
With Unit 2 operating at power, the following changes are observed:
- RBCCW Temperature lower than normal.
- Annunciator 2-XA-55-4C-6 RBCCW Surge Tank High Level is in alarm.
Which ONE of the following describes a cause for these indications and the corrective action required?
A.
Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak into RBCCW. Trip and isolate the Recirculation Pump.
B.oI
RCW leak in the RBCCW heat exchanger(s). Remove RBCCW from service following unit
shutdown.
C.
RWCU leak into RBCCW via non-regenerative heat exchanger. Isolate RWCU.
D.
Drywell equipment drain sump heat exchanger leak into RBCCW. Isolate DW Equipment Drain
Sump heat exchanger.
KIA Statement:
400000 Component Cooling Water
A2.02 - Ability to (a) predict the impacts of the following on the CCWS and (b) based on those
predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those abnormal
operation: High/low surge tank level
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the effect of a leak into the RBCCW system and determine which procedure
addresses this condition .
References:
References:
1-EOI Appendic ies8Gand12, 1-AOI-32-2
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
Level of Knowledge Justification:Thisquestionisratedas
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
CIAduetotherequ
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
irementtoassemble
0610 NRC Exam
,sort,andintegratethepartsofthequestiontopredictanoutcome
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
.This requires mentallyusingthisknowledgeanditsmeaningtopredictthe
Plausibility Analysis:
correct outcome.0610NRCExam
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
1. Which leak path would provide the indications given in the question stem.
Analysis:Inordertoanswerthis
2. What actions would be required to mitigate the problem .
quest ion correctly the candidate must determinethefollowing
NOTE: All distractors are plausible leak paths into RBCCW but would indicate higher temperatures.
: 1.Whetherthevent valves automaticallyswaptobesuppliedbyCADormustbemanuall
A is incorrect. A Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
y aligned.2.WhetherCADsupplytoDW
B is Correct.
Control A ir automaticallyswapsormustbe
C is incorrect. A RWCU leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
manually aligned.Ais incorrect.Thisis plausible becausetheventvalvesDOfailclosed, however ,theycanbeoperated
D is incorrect. A DW Equipment Drain Sump HX leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.
w ith manual alignmentoftheCAD Tanks.Bis incorrect.
 
Thisisp lausible becausetheventvalveswillautoswaptocontrolfromtheCADsupply
(
line , howeve rtheCAD tanksmustbe
BFN
manually aligned.Cis correct.Dis incorrect.Thisisplausible
Unit 1
becasetheCADsystemmustbe
RBCCW
manually initiated, howeveroncethisi s accomplished
SURGE TANK
, no further alignment i s necessary.
LEVEL HIGH
(BFN1*EOIAPPENDIX*12UNIT1PRIMARYCONTAINMENTVENTINGRev.0Page4 ofaf.VERIFY1-FIC-84-20,PATHAVENTF
1-LA-70-2A
LOWCONT , i s indicating approximately100scfm.g.CONTINUEinth isprocedureatstep12.
(Page 1 of 2)
10.VENTtheDrywellusing1-FIC-84-19
Panel 9-4
,PATHBVENTFLOWCONT
1-XA-55-4C
, as follows:a.VERIFYCLOSED
SensorlTrip Point:
1-FCV-64-141
1-LS-070-0002A
,DRYWELLDPCOMPBYPASSVALVE(Panel1-9-3).
b.PLACEkeylockswitch1-HS-84-36,SUPPRCHBR/DWVENTISOLBYPSELECT,toDRYWELLposition(Panel1-9-54)
.c.VERIFYOPEN1-FCV-64-29
,DRYWELLVENTINBDISOLVALVE(Panel1-9-54)
.d.PLACE1-FIC-84-19,PATHBVENTFLOWCONT,inAUTOwithsetpointat100scfm(Panel1-9-55).e.PLACEkeylockswitch1-HS
-84-19, 1-FCV-84-19 CONTROL , inOPEN(Panel1-9-55)
.f.VERIFY1-FIC-84
-19,PATHBVENTFLOWCONT,isindicatingapproximately100scfm
.g.CONTINUEinthisprocedureatstep12.11.VENTtheDrywellus
ing 1-FIC-84-20
,PATHAVENTFLOWCONT,as
follows:a.VERIFYCLOSED1-FCV-64-141,DRYWELLDPCOMPBYPASSVALVE(Panel1-9-3)
.b.PLACEkeylockswitch1-HS-84
-35,SUPPRCHBR I DWVENTISOLBYPSELECT
,toDRYWELLposition(Panel1-9-54).c.VERIFYOPEN
1-FCV-64-31
,DRYWELLINBDISOLVALVE(Panel1-9-54)
.d.VERIFY1-FIC-84-20
,PATHAVENTFLOWCONT
,inAUTOwithsetpointat100scfm(Panel1-9-55).
e.PLACEkeylockswitch1-HS-84-20, 1-FCV-84-20
ISOLATION BYPASS ,inBYPASS(Panel1
-9-55).f.VERIFY1-FIC-84-20
,PATHAVENTFLOWCONT
,isindicatingapproximately100scfm
.
(1-EOI APPENDIX-12
Rev.0 BFN PRIMARY CONTAINMENT
VENTINGPage7of8UNIT1 A IT ACHMENT 1...J...Jo 3: 0 w s en 2" It: I-W o&, 64-34>en.....0 0I-c>>A-N N:E....0'?W eo-e.....eo en>--en I.....z I w>'---'" 0 0'"'?0....-e eo eo 9&#xa3;-\79en we:: ClWiQ.u....Jo o...JZ o w<0 gz...J en>-z alO al z e::<e::i=1-e::<Ou.Ou. 1-1-Itl en tll-<i5 Z J: wx<;e::>w ox I-W
(BFNCROSSTIECADTO1-EOIAPPENDIX-8GUNIT1 DRYWELLCONTROLAIRRev.0Page1 of 2 LOCATION:Unit1ControlRoomATTACHMENTS:None1.OPENthefollowingvalves
:*0-FCV-84-5,CADATANKN2OUTLETVALVE(Unit1,Panel1-9-54)*0-FCV-84-16,CADBTANKN2OUTLETVALVE(Unit1,Panel1-9-55).2.VERIFY0-PI-84-6,VAPORAOUTLETPRESS,and0-PI-84-17
,VAPORBOUTLETPRESS,indicateapproximately100psigPanel1-9-54andPanel1-9-55).
3.PLACEkeylockswitch1-HS-84-48,CADACROSSTIETODWCONTROLAIR,inOPEN(Panel1-9-54).4.CHECKOPEN1-FSV-84-48,CADACROSSTIETODWCONTROLAIR,(Panel1-9-54).5.PLACEkeylockswitch1-HS-84-49,CADBCROSSTIETODWCONTROLAIR,inOPEN(Panel1-9-55).6.CHECKOPEN1-FSV-84-49,CADBCROSSTIETODWCONTROLAIR(Panel1-9-55).7.CHECKMAINSTEAMRELIEFVLVAIRACCUMPRESSLOW,1-PA-32-31,alarmcleared(1-XA-55-3D,Window18).8.IFMAINSTEAMRELIEFVLVAIRACCUMPRESSLOW,1-PA-32-31,annunciatorisorremainsinalarm(1-XA-55-3D,Window18),THENDETERMINEwhichDrywellControlAirheaderisdepressurizedasfollows:
a.DISPATCHpersonneltoUnit1,RB,EI565ft,toMONITORthefollowingindicationsforlowpressure:*1-PI-084-0051,DWCONTAIRN2SUPPLYPRESSindicator,forCADA(RB, EI.565,byDrywellAccess
Door),*1-PI-084-0050,DWCONTAIRN2SUPPLYPRESSindicator,forCADB(RB,EI.565,leftsideof480VRBVentBoard1B)
.
(BFN Loss Of Control Air 1-AOI-32-2
Unit 1 Rev.0001Page5 of 272.0SYMPTOMS (continued)
*REACTOR CHANNELA(B)AUTOSCRAM
annunciator, (1-XA-55-5B
, Window1(2))inalarm
.*MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW annunciator, (1-XA-55-3D, Window18)inalarm
.3.0AUTOMATICACTIONSA.U-1TOU-2
CONT AIR CROSSTIE , 1-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE to separateUnits1&2whencontrolAir
HeaderControlAir
Header pressure reaches65psig loweringatthevalve.
B.UNIT2TOUNIT3 CONTROL AIR CROSSTIE, 2-PCV-032-3901,willCLOSE to separateUnits2and3whenControlAir
Header pressurereaches65psig
loweringatthevalve.C.CAD SUPPLY PRESS REGULATOR, 1-PCV-084-0706, will select nitrogen from CAD TankAat s75psigControlAir
pressure to supplythefollowing:
1.SUPPR CHBRVACRELIEF VALVE , 1-FSV-064-0020
2.SUPPR CHBRVACRELIEFVALVE, 1-FSV-064-0021
D.INSTGAS SELECTOR VALVE , 1-PCV-084-0033, will select nitrogenfromCAD TankAto supply the following:
1.DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUSTTOSGTS, 1-FSV-084-0019
2.DRYWELL VENTINBDISOL VALVE , 1-FSV-064-0029
3.SUPPR CHMBR VENTINBDISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0032E.INSTGAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0034, will select nitrogenfromCAD TankBto supply the following:
1.DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUSTTOSGTS, 1-FSV-084-0020
2.DRYWELL INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0031
3.SUPPR CHBR INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0034
.
(BFN Loss Of Control Air 1-AOI-32-2
Unit 1Rev.0001Page7 of 27 4.2 Subsequent
Actions (continued)
NOTECNDSBSTRPMPSDISCHBYPASSTOCOND1C
,1-FCV-002-0029AandCNDSBSTRPMPSDISCHBYPASSTOCOND1B,1-FCV-002-0029BbothfailCLOSEDonalossofcontrolair.[3]IFthereisNOTaflowpathforCondensatesystem,THENSTOPtheCondensatePumpsandCondensateBooster
Pumps.REFERTO1-01-2.[4]IFanyOutboardMSIVcloses,THENPLACEtheassociatedhandsw
itchonPanel1-9-3intheCLOSEposition.
NOTERSWSTRGTNKISOLATION
,0-FCV-25-32,failsCLOSEDonlossofcontrola
ir.o o[5]STARTaHighPressureFirePump.REFERTO0-01-26.
0[6]OPENCADSYSTEMAN2SHUTOFFVALVE,0-FCV-84-5,atPanel1-9-54.
0[7]OPENCADSYSTEMBN2SHUTOFFVALVE
, 0-FCV-84-16,atPanel1-9-55
.0[8]CHECKRCWpumpmotorampsandPERFORMSteps
4.2[8.1]through4.2[8.5]toreduceRCWflow:
(25.RO 400000A2.02
OO l/C/A/T2G I/RBCCW//400000A2
.02/3.8/4.I/RO/SRO/ll/l6/07 RMSWithUn it2operat ingatpower,thefollowingchangesare
observed:-RBCCW Temperature
lowerthannormal.-Annunc iator 2-XA-55-4C-6 RBCCWSurgeTankH
igh Level isinalarm.Wh ichONEofthefollowing
descr ibesacausefortheseind
icationsandthe corrective
act ion required?A.Reactor RecirculationPumpsealcoolerleakintoRBCCW.TripandisolatetheRecirculationPump
.B.oIRCWleak inthe RBCCW heat exchanger(s).
Remove RBCCW from service follow ing unit shutdown.C.RWCUleakinto
RBCCW v ia non-regenerative
heat exchanger.IsolateRWCU.
D.Drywell equipmentdrainsumpheat
exchangerleakintoRBCCW.
Isolate DW Equipment Dra inSumpheat exchanger.KIA Statement:
400000 Component Cooling Water A2.02-Abilityto(a)
predict the impactsofthefollow
ingontheCCWSand(b)basedonthose
predictions
, use procedurestocorrect,control,ormitigate the consequencesofthoseabnormal
operation:High/lowsurgetanklevel
KIA Justification:
Th is question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
candidatetousespecificplantconditionsto
determine the effectofaleakintothe
RBCCW system and determinewhichprocedureaddressesthiscondition
.References:
Level of Knowledge Justification:ThisquestionisratedasCIAduetothe
requirementtoassemb le , sort ,andinteg ratethepartsofthe
quest iontopred ict an outcome.Th is requires mentally us ing thisknowledgeanditsmeaningto
predict the correct outcome.0610NRCExam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
Analysis:Inordertoanswerth
is question correctly the candidate must determ inethefollow ing: 1.Whichleakpathwould
providetheindications given inthe quest ion stem.2.Whatactionswouldberequiredtomitigatetheproblem
.NOTE:Alldistractorsareplaus ibleleakpaths into RBCCWbutwould indicate higher temperatures
.Ais incorrect.
A Reactor Rec irculat ionPumpseal coolerleakwouldcause
RBCCW temperaturetorise.Bis Correct.Cis incorrect.ARWCUleak would cause RBCCW temperaturetor ise.Dis incorrect.ADWEqu ipmentDrainSumpHXleakwouldcause
RBCCW temperaturetorise.  
(BFN Unit 1 RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A(Page1of2)
Panel 9-4 1-XA-55-4C
SensorlTrip
Point: 1-LS-070-0002A
1-ARP-9-4C
1-ARP-9-4C
Rev.0015 Page 12 of 434Inches Above CenterLineofTank
Rev. 0015
c.Sensor Location: Probable Cause: Automatic Action: Operator Action: RBCCW surge tankonthefourthfloorintheM-Gsetroom
Page 12 of 43
.A.Makeup valve 1-FCV-70-1 open.B.By pass valve 1-2-1369 leaking.<'S.Leakintothesystem.
4 Inches Above Center Line of Tank
None A.VERIFY make-upvalve1-FCV-70-1closed,using
c.
RBCCW SYS SURGE TANKFILLVALVE,1-HS-70-1
Sensor
,onPanel 1-9-4.B.CHECK RBCCW PUMP SUCTIONHDRTEMP,1-TIS-70-3, indicates water temperature
Location:
is 100&deg;Forless ,onPanel1-9-4.
Probable
C.DISPATCH personneltoverifyhighlevel
Cause:
, ensure bypass valve, 1-2-1369 ,isclosedand
Automatic
observesightglasslevel.
Action:
D.OPENsurge tankdrainvalve
Operator
, 1-70-609 , then CLOSE valve when desiredlevelis obtained.E.REQUEST Chemistrytopulland analyze a samplefortotal gamma activity and attempt to qualifysourceofleak
Action:
.F.CHECK activityreadingon RM-90-131D.
RBCCW surge tank on the fourth floor in the M-G set room .
ContinuedonNextPage
A.
o o o
Makeup valve 1-FCV-70-1 open.
o o o  
B. Bypass valve 1-2-1369 leaking.
(BFN Unit 1 Panel 9-4 1-XA-55-4C
<'S. Leak into the system.
1-ARP-9-4CRev.0015 Page13of43 RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A, Window 6(Page2of2)
None
Operator Action: (Continued)
A. VERIFY make-up valve 1-FCV-70-1 closed, using RBCCW SYS
NOTE[NERlC]ReactorRecirculationPumpsealcoolerleakagemaybeindicatedbyarisein1-RM-90-131(Panel1-9-10)activity
SURGE TANK FILL VALVE, 1-HS-70-1 , on Panel 1-9-4.
(1-RR-90-131/132Panel1-9-2)or
B. CHECK RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP, 1-TIS-70-3,
1-TE-68-54or67 temperature(Panel1-9-21)orloweringofanyRecircpumpsealpressure.
indicates water temperature is 100&deg;F or less, on Panel 1-9-4.
G.IFitissuspectedthattheReactorRecirculationPumpsealcooleris
C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level, ensure bypass valve,
leaking, THEN PERFORMthefollowing:
1-2-1369, is closed and observe sight glass level.
*DETERMINEwhichReactorRecirculationloopisleakingandat
D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 1-70-609, then CLOSE valve when
the discretionoftheUnitSupervisor, ISOLATE.REFER TO1-01-68Section7
desired level is obtained.
.1or8.2asapplicable.
E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma
COOLDOWN isrequiredtopreventhangerorshock
activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.
suppressorsfromexceeding
F.
their maximumtravelrange.
CHECK activity reading on RM-90-131D.
0*WHENprimarysystempressureisbelow125psigandatthe
Continued on Next Page
discretionoftheUnitSupervisor, THEN ISOLATE the RBCCWSystemtopreclude
o
damagetothe RBCCW PIPING.[IEN
o
89-054 , GE SIL-459)0 H.START selectivevalvingtodetermine
o
in-leakagesource,ifpresent.0
o
(References:
o
1-45E620-41-47E610-70-1FSARSection10
o
.6.4and13.6.2  
 
26.RO 400000G2.4.31
(
00 lICf A/T2G 1 IRBCCWff4000002.4.3Of/ROfSRO/NOUnit3isat100%rated
BFN
powerwiththefollowingindications
Unit 1
:*RECIRCPUMPMTRBTEMPHIGH
Panel 9-4
(3-ARP-9-4BW13)inalarm.
1-XA-55-4C
*RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3AW17)inalarm
1-ARP-9-4C
.*RBCCW SURGE TANKLEVELHIGH (3-ARP-9-4CW6)inalarm
Rev. 0015
.*RXBLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3AW22)inalarm.*RECIRCPMPMTR3B
Page 13 of 43
WINDINGANDBRGTEMP
RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A, Window 6
recorder 3-TR-68-84isreading170
(Page 2 of 2)
of and rising.*RBCCW PUMP SUCTIONHDRTEMP 3-TIS-70-3isreading140
Operator
ofandrising.*RWCU NON-REGENERATIVEHXDISCHTEMPHIGHinalarm
Action:
.*AREA RADIATION MONITORRE-90-13andRE-90-14are
(Continued)
inalarmread
NOTE
ing 55 mrlhrandrising.WhichONEofthe
[NERlC] Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 1-RM-90-131
following describestheaction(s)thatshouldbetaken?
(Panel 1-9-10) activity (1-RR-90-131/132 Panel 1-9-2) or 1-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature
REFERENCE PROVIDED A.01Enter3-EOI-3, Secondary ContainmentControl.Tripandisolate3BRecircPump
(Panel 1-9-21) or lowering of any Recirc pump seal pressure.
.Commence a normal shutdown and cooldown in accordancewith3-GOI-100-12A,UnitShutdown
G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is
.B.Enter3-EOI-3, Secondary ContainmentControl.Tripandisolate3BRecircPump.Enter3-EOI-1
leaking, THEN
,RPVControlatStepRC-1
PERFORM the following:
.C.TripRWCU pumpsandisolateRWCUsystem.Close
*
RBCCW SectionalizingValve3-FCV-70-48toisolate non-essentialloadsand maximizecoolingto3BRecirc
DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and at
.Pump.EOIentryisnotrequired
the discretion of the Unit Supervisor, ISOLATE. REFER TO
.D.Enter3-EOI-3, Secondary ContainmentControl.TripRWCU
1-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable. COOLDOWN is
pumps and isolateRWCUsystem
required to prevent hanger or shock suppressors from exceeding
.Commenceanormal shutdown in accordance
their maximum travel range.
with 3-GOI-100-12A,UnitShutdown
0
.KIAStatement:
*
400000 Component Cooling Water2.4.31-Emergency Procedures
WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig and at the
IPlanKnowledgeof
discretion of the Unit Supervisor, THEN
annunciatorsalarmsandindications,anduseofthe
ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the
response instructions
RBCCW PIPING.[IEN 89-054, GE SIL-459)
.KIA Justification:
0
This question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source, if present.
candidatetousespecificplantconditionsto
0
determine the correctiveactionsrequiredduetoan
(
emergency involving RBCCWbasedon annunciators
References:
and indications
1-45E620-4
.References:
1-47E610-70-1
3-EOI-3 flowchart,3-ARP9-3and
FSAR Section 10.6.4 and 13.6.2
3-ARP-9-4Levelof Knowledge Justification:Thisquestionisratedas
 
CIAduetothe requirementtoassemble
26. RO 400000G2.4.31 00 lICfA/T2G1IRBCCWff4000002.4.3Of/ROfSRO/NO
, sort ,andintegratethepartsofthequestiontopredictanoutcome.This
Unit 3 is at 100% rated power with the following indications :
requiresmentallyusingthisknowledgeanditsmeaningto
*
predict the correct outcome.(0610NRCExam
RECIRC PUMP MTR B TEMP HIGH (3-ARP-9-4B W13) in alarm.
REFERENCE PROVIDED: 3-EOI-3 flowchart Plausibility
*
Analysis: (Inorderto answerthisquestion
RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W17) in alarm.
correctlythecandidatemust
*
determinethefollowing:1.EOIEntryisrequiredsolelybasedonARMalarms.2.Locationoftheleakisfromthe3BRecicPump
RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH (3-ARP-9-4C W6) in alarm.
.3.RWCU temperature
*
indicationsaredueto insufficientcoolingbyRBCCW,notaRWCUleak.
RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W22) in alarm.
4.Appropriate
*
actions per 3-EOI-3aretoisolatetheleakand
RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP recorder 3-TR-68-84 is reading 170 of and
monitorradiationlevels.
rising.
5.JustificationforUnit Shudwon and CooldownareduetotheRecircLoopbeingisolatedatrated
*
temperature
RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP 3-TIS-70-3 is reading 140 of and rising.
and pressure (pipe hanger and supportissue),andNOTDirectedby3-EOI-3.Aiscorrect.Bisincorrect.Entering3-EOI-1toinitiateascramisNOTrequireduntilradiationlevelsapproach1000mr/hrinanyarea.Thisis
*
plausiblebecuasethelocationoftheleakandrequiredisolationarecorrect.Cis incorrect.Thisis plausibleifthe candidate incorrectly
RWCU NON-REGENERATIVE HX DISCH TEMP HIGH in alarm.
determinesthatRWCUiscausingthe
*
temperatureissueswith3BRecircPumpandnotviceversa
AREA RADIATION MONITOR RE-90-13 and RE-90-14 are in alarm reading 55 mrlhr and rising.
.IfRWCUwastheleaklocation,the
Which ONE of the following describes the action(s) that should be taken?
RBCCW temperaturewouldnotbehighenoughtoprovidethegiven
REFERENCE PROVIDED
indications
A. 01
.Theleakwouldhavetohaveoccurredinthe
Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Commence a
NRHXwhichisbelowtheindicated
normal shutdown and cooldown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .
RBCCW temperature.Disincorrect.Thisis plausibleifthe candidate incorrectly
B.
determinesthatRWCUiscausingthe
Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Enter 3-EOI-1,
temperatureissueswith3BRecircPumpandnotviceversa
RPV Control at Step RC-1.
.Inadditiontothe
C.
justification
Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system. Close RBCCW Sectionalizing Valve 3-FCV-70-48
above, commencing
to isolate non-essential loads and maximize cooling to 3B Recirc. Pump. EOI entry is not required.
a shutdown in accordancewith3-EOI-3isnot
D.
appropriateuntilARMsindicate
Enter 3-EOI-3 , Secondary Containment Control. Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system.
greater than1000mr/hr.(  
Commence a normal shutdown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .
(OPL171.047
KIA Statement:
Revis ion 12 Appendix CPage35of41
400000 Component Cooling Water
DEMIN WATER MAKEUP DRW..................................RCW t-_........U2 TCV'S RCW TCV'S RCW*, II1II""**"" TCV'S RCW 626 623 0-70-607 601 U2-11.....-1 RBCCW RETURN",--====-__J HEADER CHEMICAL FEED 633 RBCCW SUPPLY HEADER 70 69 638 U3 67 68'--........U3 U2 TP-1: RBCCW SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM  
2.4.31 - Emergency Procedures I Plan Knowledge of annunciators alarms and indications, and use of the
(8FN Unit 3 Panel 9-4 3-XA-55-48
response instructions.
3-ARP-9-48Rev.0036 Page 17 of 45 RECIRCPUMPMTRB TEMP HIGH 3-TA-68-84(Page1of1)
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
SensorlTripPoint:Alarmisfrom
plant conditions to determine the corrective actions required due to an emergency involving RBCCW
3-TR-68-84
based on annunciators and indications.
,Panel3-9-2
References:
3-TE-68-73ARECIRCPMPMTR3B-THRBRG
3-EOI-3 flowchart, 3-ARP 9-3 and 3-ARP-9-4
UPPERFACE(190&deg;F)
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
3-TE-68-73CRECIRCPMPMTR3B-THRBRG
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
LOWERFACE(190&deg;F)
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
3-TE-68-73ERECIRCPMPMTR
(
3B-UPPER GUIDEBRG(190&deg;F)
0610 NRC Exam
3-TE-68-73NRECIRCPMPMTR
 
3B-LOWERGUIDEBRG(190&deg;F)
REFERENCE PROVIDED: 3-EOI-3 flowchart
3-TE-68-73GRECIRCPMPMTR
Plausibility Analysis:
3B-MOTOR WINDINGA(216&deg;F)3-TE-68-73JRECIRCPMPMTR
(
3B-MOTOR WINDINGB(216&deg;F)3-TE-68-73LRECIRCPMPMTR
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
3B-MOTOR WINDINGC(216&deg;F)3-TE-68-73TRECIRCPMPMTR
1. EOI Entry is required solely based on ARM alarms.
3B-SEAL NO.2 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
2. Location of the leak is from the 3B Recic Pump.
3-TE-68-73URECIRCPMPMTR
3. RWCU temperature indications are due to insufficient cooling by RBCCW, not a RWCU leak.
3B-SEAL NO.1 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
4. Appropriate actions per 3-EOI-3 are to isolate the leak and monitor radiation levels.
3-TE-68-67RECIRCPMPMTR3B-CLGWTRFROMSEALCLG(140&deg;F)
5. Justification for Unit Shudwon and Cooldown are due to the Recirc Loop being isolated at rated
3-TE-68-70
temperature and pressure (pipe hanger and support issue), and NOT Directed by 3-EOI-3.
RECIRC PMPMTR3B-CLGWTRFROMBRG(140&deg;F)
A is correct.
Sensor Location: Probable Cause: Automatic Action: Temperatureelementsarelocatedonrecirculationpumpmotor,Elevation563
B is incorrect. Entering 3-EOI-1 to initiate a scram is NOT required until radiation levels approach 1000
.12,Unit3drywell.A.Possiblebearingfailure.B.Possiblemotoroverload.
mr/hr in any area. This is plausible becuase the location of the leak and required isolation are correct.
C.Insufficientcoolingwater.D.Possiblesealfailure.E.Highdrywelltemperature.
C is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the
None Operator Action: A..CHECKfollowingonPanel3-9-4:
temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. If RWCU was the leak location, the
*RBCCWPUMPSUCTIONHDRTEMP
RBCCW temperature would not be high enough to provide the given indications. The leak would have to
temperature
have occurred in the NRHX which is below the indicated RBCCW temperature.
indicatingswitch,3-TIS-70-3normal (summer 70-95&deg;F, winter 60-80&deg;F).*RBCCWPRICTMTOUTLEThandswitch, 3-HS-70-47A
D is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the
(3-FCV-70-47)
temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. In addition to the justification above,
OPEN.o o o B.CHECK the temperatureofthecooling
commencing a shutdown in accordance with 3-EOI-3 is not appropriate until ARMs indicate greater than
waterleavingthesealandbearingcoolers
1000 mr/hr.
<140&deg;FonRECIRCPMPMTR3BWINDINGANDBRGTEMP temperaturerecorder,3-TR-68-84onPanel3-9-21
(
.0 C.LOWERrecirepumpspeeduntilBearing
 
and/or Winding temperaturesarebelowthealarmsetpoint.
(
0 D.CONTACTSiteEngineeringtoPERFORMa
OPL171.047
complete assessment
Revision 12
and monitoringofallseal conditionsparticularlysealleakage, temperature,andpressureofallstagesforRecircPumpseal
Appendix C
temperaturesinexcessof180&deg;F
Page 35 of 41
.0 References:
DEMIN
3-45E620-5GE731E320RE3-47E610-68-1
WATER ----.,r-I~>l<lh
3-SIMI-68BTechSpec3.4.1FSARSection13.6.2  
MAKEUP
(BFN Unit3 RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH3-RA-90-131A
DRW
Panel 9-3 3-XA-55-3A
.................. ................
SensorlTrip
RCW
Point: RE-90-131D
t-_........U2
ill(NOTE2)3-ARP-9-3A
TCV'S
Rev.0036 Page 25 of 51 HI-HI(NOTE2)(Page 1 of 2)Hialarmfrom
RCW
recorderHi-Hialarmfrom
.""",,~n TCV'S
drawer (2)Chemlabshouldbe contacted for current setpointsper0-TI-45.
RCW
Sensor Location: Probable Cause: Automatic Action: RE-90-131A
*,II1II""**"" TCV'S
RBCCWHXRxBldg, EI593,R-20S-L1NEHXtubeleakinto
RCW
RBCCW system.None Operator Action: A.DETERMINEcauseofalarmby
I&lfiI~~**~~f:J---+-"OUTLET
observing following:
626
1.RBCCWand RCW EFFLUENT RADIATION recorder, 3-RR-90-131/132RedpenonPanel3-9-2.
623
2.RBCCW EFFLUENT OFFLINERADMON, 3-RM-90-131D
0-70-607
onPanel3-9-10.
601
o o B.NOTIFY Chemistrytosample RBCCWfortotal gamma activity to verify condition.
U2-11.....-1
0 C.START an immediate investigation
RBCCW
to determineifsourceofleakis
RETURN",--====-__J
RWCU Non-regenerative,FuelPool Cooling, Reactor Water SampleorRWCU RecircPump3Aor3BSeal
HEADER
Water heat exchanger(s).
CHEMICAL
0 D.(NERlC]CHECK Followingforindicationof
FEED
Reactor RecirculationPumpSealHeat
633
Exchanger leak: 1.LOWERING in reactor Recirculation
RBCCW
pump 3A(3B)NO.1or2 SEAL, 3-PI-68-64A
SUPPLY
or 3-PI-68-63A
HEADER
(3-PI-68-76A
70
or 3-PI-68-75A)onPanel3-9-4.
69
0 2.TemperatureriseonCLGWTRFROM
638
SEAL CLG TE-68-54, on RECIRCPMPMTR3A WINDINGANDBRG TEMP temperature
U3
recorder, 3-TR-68-58
67
,onPanel3-9-21.
68
0 3.TemperatureriseonCLGWTRFROM
'--........ U3
SEAL CLG TE-68-67, on RECIRCPMPMTR3B WINDINGANDBRGTEMP
U2
temperature
TP-1: RBCCW SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM
recorder, 3-TR-68-84,onPanel3-9-21.
 
0 Continued on Next Page  
(
(BFN Unit 3 Panel 9-3 3-XA-55-3A 3-ARP-9-3ARev.0036Page26 of 51 RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-131A, Window 17 (Page 2 of 2)Operator Action: (Continued)
8FN
E.IF itisdeterm inedthesource ofleakageisfrom
Unit 3
Reactor RecircPumpA(B), THEN 1.ISOLATE Reactor RecirculationLoopA(B)per3-01-68,as
Panel 9-4
3-XA-55-48
3-ARP-9-48
Rev. 0036
Page 17 of 45
RECIRC
PUMP MTR B
TEMP HIGH
3-TA-68-84
(Page 1 of 1)
SensorlTrip Point:
Alarm is from 3-TR-68-84, Panel 3-9-2
3-TE-68-73A RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG UPPER FACE (190&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73C RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG LOWER FACE (190&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73E RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-UPPER GUIDE BRG (190&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73N RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-LOWER GUIDE BRG (190&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73G RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING A (216&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73J RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING B (216&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73L RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING C (216&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73T RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.2 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
3-TE-68-73U RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.1 CAVITY(180&deg;F)
3-TE-68-67 RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG (140&deg;F)
3-TE-68-70 RECIRC PMPMTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM BRG (140&deg;F)
Sensor
Location:
Probable
Cause:
Automatic
Action:
Temperature elements are located on recirculation pump motor, Elevation 563.12,
Unit 3 drywell.
A. Possible bearing failure.
B. Possible motor overload.
C. Insufficient cooling water.
D. Possible seal failure.
E. High drywell temperature.
None
Operator
Action:
A. . CHECK following on Panel 3-9-4:
*
RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP temperature indicating
switch, 3-TIS-70-3 normal (summer 70-95&deg;F, winter 60-80&deg;F).
*
RBCCW PRI CTMT OUTLET handswitch, 3-HS-70-47A
(3-FCV-70-47) OPEN.
o
o
o
B. CHECK the temperature of the cooling water leaving the seal and
bearing coolers < 140&deg;F on RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND
BRG TEMP temperature recorder, 3-TR-68-84 on Panel 3-9-21.
0
C. LOWER recire pump speed until Bearing and/or Winding
temperatures are below the alarm setpoint.
0
D. CONTACT Site Engineering to PERFORM a complete assessment
and monitoring of all seal conditions particularly seal leakage,
temperature, and pressure of all stages for Recirc Pump seal
temperatures in excess of 180&deg;F.
0
References:
3-45E620-5
GE 731E320RE
3-47E610-68-1
3-SIMI-68B
Tech Spec 3.4.1
FSAR Section 13.6.2
 
(
BFN
Unit3
RBCCW EFFLUENT
RADIATION
HIGH
3-RA-90-131 A
Panel 9-3
3-XA-55-3A
SensorlTrip Point:
RE-90-131D
ill
(NOTE 2)
3-ARP-9-3A
Rev. 0036
Page 25 of 51
HI-HI
(NOTE 2)
(Page 1 of 2)
Hi alarm from recorder
Hi-Hi alarm from drawer
(2)
Chemlab should be contacted for current setpoints per 0-TI-45.
Sensor
Location:
Probable
Cause:
Automatic
Action:
RE-90-131A RBCCW HX Rx Bldg, EI593, R-20 S-L1NE
HX tube leak into RBCCW system.
None
Operator
Action:
A.
DETERMINE cause of alarm by observing following:
1.
RBCCWand RCW EFFLUENT RADIATION recorder,
3-RR-90-131/132 Red pen on Panel 3-9-2.
2.
RBCCW EFFLUENT OFFLINE RAD MON, 3-RM-90-131D on
Panel 3-9-10.
o
o
B. NOTIFY Chemistry to sample RBCCW for total gamma activity to
verify condition.
0
C. START an immediate investigation to determine if source of leak is
RWCU Non-regenerative, Fuel Pool Cooling, Reactor Water Sample
or RWCU Recirc Pump 3A or 3B Seal Water heat exchanger(s).
0
D.
(NERlC] CHECK Following for indication of Reactor Recirculation
Pump Seal Heat Exchanger leak:
1.
LOWERING in reactor Recirculation pump 3A(3B) NO.1 or 2
SEAL, 3-PI-68-64A or 3-PI-68-63A (3-PI-68-76A or 3-PI-68-75A)
on Panel 3-9-4.
0
2.
Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-54, on
RECIRC PMP MTR 3A WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature
recorder, 3-TR-68-58, on Panel 3-9-21.
0
3.
Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-67, on
RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature
recorder, 3-TR-68-84, on Panel 3-9-21.
0
Continued on Next Page
 
(
BFN
Unit 3
Panel 9-3
3-XA-55-3A
3-ARP-9-3A
Rev. 0036
Page 26 of 51
RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-131A, Window 17
(Page 2 of 2)
Operator
Action: (Continued)
E. IF it is determ ined the source of leakage is from Reactor Recirc
Pump A(B), THEN
1.
ISOLATE Reactor Recirculation Loop A(B) per 3-01-68, as
applicable.
applicable.
0 NOTECooldownisrequiredto
0
prevent hangersorshock suppressors
NOTE
from exceeding theirmaximumtravel
Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors from exceeding their maximum travel
range.2.WHEN primarysystempressureislessthan125psig, THEN ISOLATE RBCCW Systemtopreclude
range.
damage to RBCCW piping.[lEN 89-054 ,GESIL-459)0 References:
2.
WHEN primary system pressure is less than 125 psig, THEN
ISOLATE RBCCW System to preclude damage to RBCCW
piping.
[lEN 89-054 , GE SIL-459)
0
References:
3-45E620-3
3-45E620-3
3-47E610-90-3
3-47E610-90-3
GE 3-729E814-3  
GE 3-729E814-3
BFN Unit3RXBLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D(Page1 of 2)Panel 9-3 3-XA-55-3A
 
SensorlTrip
BFN
Point: RI-90-4A RI-90-8A RI-90-9A RI-90-13A
Unit3
RI-90-14A
RX BLDG AREA
RI-90-20A RI-90-21A RI-90-22A RI-90-23A
RADIATION
RI-90-24A RI-90-25A RI-90-26A RI-90-27A RI-90-28A RI-90-29A 3-ARP-9-3A
HIGH
Rev.0036 Page 32 of 51 For setpointsREFERTO 3-SIMI-90B.
3-RA-90-1D
Sensor RE-90-4MGsetareaRxBldgEI.639R-17
(Page 1 of 2)
Q-L1NE Location: RE-90-8 Main ControlRoomRxBldgEI.617
Panel 9-3
R-16 R-L1NE RE-90-9 Clean-upSystemRxBldgEI.621
3-XA-55-3A
R-16 T-L1NE RE-90-13 North Clean-upSys.RxBldgEI.593R-16
SensorlTrip Point:
P-L1NE RE-90-14 South Clean-up Sys.RxBldg EI.593R-16 S-L1NE RE-90-20 CRD-HCU WestRxBldgEI.565
RI-90-4A
R-16 R-L1NE RE-90-21 CRD-HCU EastRxBldg EI.565 R-20 R-L1NE RE-90-22TipRoomRxBldgEI.565R-19
RI-90-8A
P-L1NE RE-90-23TipDriveRxBldgEI.565R-19
RI-90-9A
P-L1NE RE-90-24HPCIRoom*RxBldgEI.519
RI-90-13A
R-21 U-L1NE RE-90-25RHRWestRxBldgEI.519
RI-90-14A
R-16 U-L1NE RE-90-26 Core Spray-RCICRxBldgEI.519R-16
RI-90-20A
N-L1NE RE-90-27CoreSprayRxBldg EI.519R-20 N-L1NE RE-90-28RHREastRxBldg EI.519R-20 U-L1NE RE-90-29 Suppression
RI-90-21A
Pool.RxBldgEI.519R-19
RI-90-22A
U-L1NE*Duetothe locationoftheRad Monitorinrelationtothe
RI-90-23A
TestlineintheHPCIQuad,theHPCIRoomRadAlarmmaybe
RI-90-24A
receivedwhentheHPCIFlowtestisin progress.Probable Cause: Automatic Action: Radiation levelshaverisenabovealarmsetpoint.HPCIFlowRate
RI-90-25A
Surveillance
RI-90-26A
in Progress.None ContinuedonNextPage
RI-90-27A
(BFN Unit3 Panel 9-3 3-XA-55-3A
RI-90-28A
3-ARP-9-3ARev.0036*Page33 of 51 Operator Action: RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D, Window 22(Page2 of 2)A.DETERMINEareawithhighradiationlevelonPanel3-9-11.(AlarmonPanel3-9-11will
RI-90-29A
automaticallyresetifradiationlevellowersbelowsetpoint.)B.IFthealarmisfromtheHPCIRoomwhileFlowtestingisbeingperformed,THEN
3-ARP-9-3A
REQUESTpersonnelattheHPCIQuadto
Rev. 0036
validate conditions
Page 32 of 51
.C.NOTIFY RADCON.D.IFtheTSCisNOTmannedanda"VALID"radiologicalcondition
For setpoints REFER TO
exists., THENUSEpublicaddresssystemto
3-SIMI-90B.
evacuateareawherehighairborne
Sensor
conditions
RE-90-4
existE.IFtheTSCismannedanda"VALID"radiologicalconditionexists, THEN REQUESTtheTSCtoevacuate
MG set area
non-essentialpersonnelfromaffectedareas.
Rx Bldg EI. 639
F.MONITORotherparametersprovidinginputtothis
R-17 Q-L1NE
annunciator
Location:
frequentlyastheseparameterswillbemaskedfromalarmingwhilethisalarmissealedin
RE-90-8
.G.IFaCREVinitiationisreceived,THEN
Main Control Room
1.VERIFYCREVA(B)Flowis2700CFM,and3300CFMas indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213)within5hoursoftheCREVinitiation.[BFPER03-017922]2.IFCREVA(B)FlowisNOT2700CFM,and
Rx Bldg EI. 617
s3300CFMas indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213)
R-16 R-L1NE
THEN PERFORMthefollowing
RE-90-9
: (Otherwise
Clean-up System
N/A)[BFPER 03-017922]a.STOPtheoperatingCREVper0-01-31
Rx Bldg EI. 621
.b.STARTthestandbyCREVper0-01-31
R-16 T-L1NE
.H.IFalarmisduetomalfunction,THENREFERTO0-01-55
RE-90-13
.I.ENTER3-EOI-3Flowchart.
North Clean-up Sys.
J.REFERTO3-AOI-79-1or3-A01-79-2ifapplicable.
Rx Bldg EI. 593
o o o o o o o o o o o o References:
R-16 P-L1NE
3-45E620-33-45E610-90-1GE730E356-1
RE-90-14
(BFN Unit 3 RBCCW SURGE TANKLEVELHIGH 3-LA-70-2A(Page1of2)
South Clean-up Sys.
Panel 9-4 3-XA-55-4C
Rx Bldg EI. 593
SensorlTrip
R-16 S-L1NE
Point: 3-LS-070-0002A
RE-90-20
3-ARP-9-4CRev.0028 Page 12 of 444inchesabove
CRD-HCU West
centerlineoftank
Rx Bldg EI. 565
Sensor Location: Probable Cause: Automatic Action: Operator Action: RBCCWsurgetankintheMGsetroomEI639'.
R-16 R-L1NE
A.Makeupvalve,3-FCV-70-1,open.B.Bypassvalve
RE-90-21
3-BYV-002-1369
CRD-HCU East
leaking.C.Leakintothesystem.
Rx Bldg EI. 565
None A.CHECKmake-upvalve3-FCV-70-1,3-HS-70-1, CLOSED onPanel3-9-4.
R-20 R-L1NE
B.CHECK RBCCWsystemwaterleavingthe
RE-90-22
RBCCWsystemheat
Tip Room
exchangersis100&deg;Forlesson3-TI-70-3,Panel3-9-4.
Rx Bldg EI. 565
C.DISPATCHpersonneltoverifyhighlevelandto
R-19 P-L1NE
ensure 3-BYV-002-1369,FCV-70-1BYPASSVALVEisCLOSED.
RE-90-23
OBSERVEsightglasslevel.
Tip Drive
D.OPENsurgetankdrainvalve, 3-DRV-070-0609.
Rx Bldg EI. 565
CLOSE valvewhendesiredlevelisobtained.
R-19 P-L1NE
E.REQUEST Chemistrytopullandanalyzeasamplefortotalgamma
RE-90-24
activityandattempttoqualifysourceofleak.
HPCI Room*
F.CHECKactivityreadingon3-RM-90-131
Rx Bldg EI. 519
Band3-RM-90-131D.
R-21 U-L1NE
ContinuedonNextPage
RE-90-25
o n o o o o
RHR West
(BFN Unit 3 Panel 9-4 3-XA-55-4C
Rx Bldg EI. 519
3-ARP-9-4CRev.0028 Page 13 of 44 RBCCW SURGETANKLEVELHIGH
R-16 U-L1NE
RE-90-26
Core Spray-RCIC
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-16 N-L1NE
RE-90-27
Core Spray
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-20 N-L1NE
RE-90-28
RHR East
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-20 U-L1NE
RE-90-29
Suppression Pool .
Rx Bldg EI. 519
R-19 U-L1NE
*
Due to the location of the Rad Monitor in relation to the Test line in the HPCI
Quad, the HPCI Room Rad Alarm may be received when the HPCI Flow test
is in progress.
Probable
Cause:
Automatic
Action:
Radiation levels have risen above alarm set point. HPCI Flow Rate Surveillance in
Progress.
None
Continued on Next Page
 
(
BFN
Unit3
Panel 9-3
3-XA-55-3A
3-ARP-9-3A
Rev. 0036 *
Page 33 of 51
Operator
Action:
RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D, Window 22
(Page 2 of 2)
A. DETERMINE area with high radiation level on Panel 3-9-11. (Alarm
on Panel 3-9-11 will automatically reset if radiation level lowers
below setpoint.)
B. IF the alarm is from the HPCI Room while Flow testing is being
performed, THEN
REQUEST personnel at the HPCI Quad to validate conditions.
C. NOTIFY RADCON.
D. IF the TSC is NOT manned and a "VALID" radiological condition
exists., THEN
USE public address system to evacuate area where high airborne
conditions exist
E. IF the TSC is manned and a "VALID" radiological condition exists,
THEN
REQUEST the TSC to evacuate non-essential personnel from
affected areas.
F.
MONITOR other parameters providing input to this annunciator
frequently as these parameters will be masked from alarming while
this alarm is sealed in.
G. IF a CREV initiation is received, THEN
1.
VERIFY CREV A(B) Flow is ~ 2700 CFM, and ~ 3300 CFM as
indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) within 5 hours of the CREV
initiation. [BFPER 03-017922]
2.
IF CREV A(B) Flow is NOT ~ 2700 CFM, and s 3300 CFM as
indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) THEN
PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)
[BFPER 03-017922]
a.
STOP the operating CREV per 0-01-31.
b.
START the standby CREV per 0-01-31.
H. IF alarm is due to malfunction, THEN
REFER TO 0-01-55.
I.
ENTER 3-EOI-3 Flowchart.
J.
REFER TO 3-AOI-79-1 or 3-A01-79-2 if applicable.
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
References:
3-45E620-3
3-45E610-90-1
GE 730E356-1
 
(
BFN
Unit 3
RBCCW
SURGE TANK
LEVEL HIGH
3-LA-70-2A
3-LA-70-2A
, Window 6(Page2"of2)Operator Action: (Continued)
(Page 1 of 2)
NOTE[NER/C)ReactorRecirculationPumpsealcoolerleakagemaybeindicatedbyarise
Panel 9-4
in3-RM-90-131(Panel3-9-10)
3-XA-55-4C
activity(3-RR-90-131/132,Panel3-9-2or3-
SensorlTrip Point:
TE-68-54or67temperature,Panel3-9-21)oraloweringinanyRecircpumpsealpressure
3-LS-070-0002A
.G.IFitissuspectedthattheReactorRecirculationPumpsealcooleris
3-ARP-9-4C
leaking, THEN PERFORMthefollow ing:*DETERMINEwhichReactorReci
Rev. 0028
rculation loop isleakingand
Page 12 of 44
ISOLATE.REFERTO3-01-68Section7
4 inches above center line of tank
.1or8.2asapplicable.
Sensor
Cooldownisrequiredtopreventhangersorshock
Location:
suppressors
Probable
from exceedingtheirmaximumtravelrange
Cause:
.0*WHENprimarysystempressureisbelow125psig, THEN ISOLATE the RBCCWSystemtopreclude
Automatic
damagetothe RBCCW piping.[IEN89-054 ,GESIL-459)
Action:
0 H.START select ive valv ingtodeterminein-leakagesource,ifpresen t.References:
Operator
3-45N620-43-47E610-70-1
Action:
FSAR Sections 10.6.4and13.6.2 3-47E822-1  
RBCCW surge tank in the MG set room EI 639'.
(EOI-3OPL171.034Revision11
A. Makeup valve, 3-FCV-70-1, open.
Append ix CPage30of30
B. Bypass valve 3-BYV-002-1369 leaking.
TABLE 4 SECONDARY CONTAINMENT
C. Leak into the system.
AREA RADIATION APPLICABLE
None
MAX NORMAL MAX SAFE POTENTIAL AREA RADIATION VALUE VALUE ISOLATION INDICATORS
A. CHECK make-up valve 3-FCV-70-1, 3-HS-70-1, CLOSED on
MRIHR MR/HR SOURCESRHRSYSI PUMPS 90-25A A LARMED 1000 FCV-74-47,48RHRSYSII PUMPS 90-2BA ALARMED 1000 FCV-74-47,48 HPC I ROOM 90-24A ALARMED 1000 FCV-73-2, 3 , 81 FCV-73-44CSSYS I PUMPS 90-26A ALARMED 1000 RCIC ROOM FCV-71-2,3 , 3 9CSSYSII PUMPS 90-27A ALARMED 1000 NO'lE TORUS FCV-73-2, 3 , 81 90-29A ALARMED 1000 FCV-74-47 , 48 GENERAL AREA FCV-71-2 , 3RBE L565W 90-20A ALARMED 1000 FC V-69-1 , 2 , 1 2 SD V VENTS&DRAI NSRBEL565E 90-2 1A ALARMED 1000 SDV VENTS&DRAINSRBE L565NE 90-23A ALARMED 1000 NO'l E TIPROOM 90-22A ALAR MED 100 ,000 TIPBALL VALVERBEL593 90-13A,14A ALARMED 1000 FCV-74-47 ,48RBEL6 21 90-9A ALARMED 1000 FCV-43-13 , 14 REC IRCMGSETS 90-4A ALARMED 1000 NO'lEREFUELFLOOR
Panel 3-9-4.
90-1A ,2A,3A ALARMED 1000 NO'l ETP-7EOI-3TABLE4
B. CHECK RBCCW system water leaving the RBCCW system heat
E MINATION REFERENCE.PROVIDED TO CANDIDATE
exchangers is 100&deg;F or less on 3-TI-70-3, Panel 3-9-4.
(-o au C")*-o wil ,H-t1UIIrrrn
C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level and to ensure
I S l H" tt rr-r<lI I I I1!l1!!!!I-!I*i ,I:.iii I III!iii!II 1 II I or II I iI iii I 1111 I I r It..I I I!!I I I'"III!I'IIi I I I I I C")*-o w
3-BYV-002-1369, FCV-70-1 BYPASS VALVE is CLOSED.
(27.RO 201003K3.03OOl/MEM/TIG
OBSERVE sight glass level.
2/85-3/Bl1/201003K3.03
D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 3-DRV-070-0609. CLOSE valve
/3.6/3.7/RO/SR0/1 1/l6/07 RMSGiventhefollowingplant
when desired level is obtained.
condit ions:*AOI85-3, CRD System Failure , d irectsamanualscrambasedonlow
E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma
reactor pressure.WhichONEofthe following PROCEDURAL
activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.
reactor pressurelimitsshouldbe
F. CHECK activity reading on 3-RM-90-131 Band 3-RM-90-131 D.
adheredtointhiscaseand
Continued on Next Page
WHY?A.980psig reactor pressure, becausethiswouldbethe
o
lowest pressure a scramcanbeensuredduetothelossof
n
accumulators
o
.B.oI900psig reactor pressure, becausethiswouldbethe
o
lowest pressure a scramcanbeensuredduetothelossof
oo
accumulators.
 
C.445psig reactor pressure, becausethiswouldbethe
(
lowest pressure requiredtoliftacontrolrod
BFN
blade.D.800psig reactor pressure, becausethisisthe Technical Specification
Unit 3
pressure for scrammingcontrolrodsfor
Panel 9-4
scramtimetesting
3-XA-55-4C
.KIAStatement:201003Con trolRodandDr ive MechanismK3.03-Knowledgeofthe
3-ARP-9-4C
effectthatalossor
Rev. 0028
malfunctionofthe CONTROLRODANDDRIVE
Page 13 of 44
MECHANISMwillhaveonfollowing
RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 3-LA-70-2A, Window 6
: Shutdown margin KIA Justification:
(Page 2"of 2)
Th is quest ion sat isfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
Operator
candidatetousespecificknowledgeofCRD
Action: (Continued)
mechanism limitationsandthebas isforthat limitationrelatedtotheab
NOTE
ility to effectandmain tain shutdown margin.References:
[NER/C) Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 3-RM-90-131
1/2/3-AOI-85-3
(Panel 3-9-10) activity (3-RR-90-131 /132, Panel 3-9-2 or 3-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature,
,OPL171.005, OPL 171.006Levelof Knowledge Justification:
Panel 3-9-21) or a lowering in any Recirc pump seal pressure.
This quest ion is ratedasMEMduetotherequ
G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is
i rementtorecallorrecognized
leaking, THEN
iscretebitsof information.
PERFORM the following:
06 10NRCExam
*
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and
Analysis: (Inordertoanswerthisquestion
ISOLATE. REFER TO 3-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable.
correctlythecandidatemust
Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors
determinethefollowing:1.The minimum pressureallowedby1/2/3-AOI85-3
from exceeding their maximum travel range.
,CRDSystemFailure.2.Thebasisforthat
0
minimum pressure.Ais incorrect.Thisis plausible because980psigisthe
*
setpointfortheLow Accumulator
WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig, THEN
Pressure alarm.Bis correct.Cis incorrect.Thisisplausible
ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the
becausetheentire statement is accurate,butisnotthepressurespecifiedby1/2/3-AOI85-3,CRDSystemFailure
RBCCW piping.
.Dis incorrect.Thisis plausiblebecausetheentire
[IEN89-054, GE SIL-459)
statement is accurate,butisnotthepressurespecifiedby1/2/3-AOI85-3,CRD
0
System Failure.
H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source , if present.
OPL171.006Revision9Page17of60
References:
C(a)A specificpatternofcontrolrod
3-45N620-4
withdrawal
3-47E610-70-1
or insertion(b)Written
FSAR Sections 10.6.4 and 13.6.2
step-by-steppathusedby
3-47E822-1
the operator in establishing
 
theexpectedrodpatternandfluxshapeatrated
(
power(c)Deviationfromthe
EOI - 3
establishedpathcouldresultin
OPL171.034
potentiallyhighcontrolrod
Revision 11
worths (9)Shutdown margin OBJ.V.B.15.c (a)Technical specificationsoftheplantrequireknowing
Appendix C
whether theplantcanbe
Page 30 of 30
shutdowntoasafe level (b)Withouttheinsertion
TABLE 4
capability
SECONDARY CONTAINMENT AREA RADIATION
of Obj.V.B.20.gallcontrolrods, shutdown marginwillnotbeasgreat,thus
APPLICABLE
closer to an inadvertent
MAX NORMAL
criticality(10)ControlRodWorth
MAX SAFE
variables (a)Moderator temperature
POTENTIAL
OBJ.V.8.20.ei.As temperaturerises,SER3-05slowingdownlengthand
AREA
thermal diffusion length increase ii.Rodworth increases with as moderator temperature
RADIATION
increases(b)Voideffectsonrodworth
VALUE
i.Asvoidsincrease, averageneutronflux
VALUE
energy increases ii.U238andPu240will
ISOLATION
(capturemore
INDICATORS
epithermal
MRIHR
neutrons through resonance
MR/HR
(BFN CRD System Failure 1-AOI-85-3
SOURCES
Unit 1Rev.0003 Page 7 of 11 4.1 Immediate Actions (continued)
RHR SYS I PUMPS
[2]IFoperatingCRDPUMPhastr
90-25A
ippedANDbackupCRDPUMPisNOT available ,THEN(OtherwiseN/A)
ALARMED
PERFORMthefollowingatPanel1-9-5:
1000
[2.1]PLACECRDSYSTEMFLOW
FCV-74-47, 48
CONTROL , 1-FIC-85-11
RHR SYS II PUMPS
, inMANatminimumsetting
90-2BA
.D[2.2]ATTEMPT TO RESTARTtrippedCRDPumpusingoneofthefollowing:*CRDPUMP1B ,using1-HS-85-2A*CRDPump1A,using
ALARMED
1-HS-85-1A
1000
D[2.3]ADJUSTCRDSYSTEMFLOW
FCV-74-47,48
CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11,toestablishthefo
HPCI ROOM
llowing cond itions:*CRDCLGWTRHDRDP
90-24A
, 1-PDI-85-18A, approx imately20psid.D*CRDSYSTEMFLOW
A LARMED
CONTROL , 1-FIC-85-11,between40and65gpm
1000
.D[2.4]BALANCECRDSYSTEMFLOW
FCV -73 -2, 3, 81
CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11
FCV-73-44
, and PLACEinAUTOor BALANCE.D[3]IF ReactorPressureislessthan900ps
CS SYS I PUMPS
ig AND e itherofthe following conditions
90-26A
exists:*In-serviceCRDPumptr ipped and neitherCRDPumpcanbestarted , OR*Charging WaterPressurecanNOTberestoredand
ALARMED
maintainedabove940psig
1000
, THEN PERFORMthefollowing: (Otherw ise N/A)[3.1][3.2]MANUALLY SCRAMReactorand
RCIC ROOM
IMMEDIATELY
FCV-71 -2, 3, 39
PLACEtheReactorModeSwitchinthe
CS SYS II PUMPS
SHUTDOWN position.REFERTO1-AOI-100-1.[Item
90-27A
020]D D
ALAR MED
OPL 171.006 Revision 9Page30of60
1000
((6)The withdraw motion is terminated
NO'l E
prior to reaching the desired positionandtherodissettledas
TORUS
discussed earlier.d.Cooling water is continuously
FCV-73 -2, 3, 81
suppliedviathe P-underportand insert header.(1)Flowfromplug
90-29A
type orifice in flange follows passage between outer tube and thermal sleeve to outer screen.(2)Cooling water is required to protect theOBJ.V.B.18 graphitarsealsfromhigh
ALAR MED
reactor temperatures.(3)Long exposuresathigh temperatures
1000
will resultinbrittle, fast-wearing seals.(4)Drive temperature
FCV-74 -47, 48
should be maintained
GENERAL AREA
at<350&deg;Fandthe cause should be investigatedifit exceeds this value.(5)Concern is thatthehigh temperaturemaybe causedbya leaking scram discharge valve.(6)This problemshouldbe corrected assoonas possible to prevent damage tothevalve.e.Scram function(1)Therearetwo sources of water thatcanOBJ.V.B/E.11,beusedtoscramadrive:
FCV-71 -2, 3
reactor water V.D.10 and accumulator
RB EL 565 W
water.(2)Reactor water scram feature (a)Reactorwater,ifathigh
90-20A
enough pressure, is capable of scrammingMoreonrequired
ALARMED
1000
FCV-69-1, 2, 12
SDV VENTS & DRAI NS
RB EL 565 E
90-21A
ALARMED
1000
SDV VENTS & DRAINS
RB EL 565 NE
90-23A
ALARM ED
1000
NO'l E
TIP ROOM
90-22A
ALAR MED
100 ,000
TI P BAL L VALVE
RB EL 593
90-13A, 14A
A LARMED
1000
FCV-74 -47 ,48
RB EL 621
90-9A
ALARMED
1000
FCV-43-13, 14
RECIRC MG SETS
90-4A
ALARMED
1000
NO'lE
REFUEL FLOOR
90-1A, 2A, 3A
ALARMED
1000
NO'lE
TP -7 EOI-3 TABLE 4
 
E
MINATION
REFERENCE
.PROVIDED TO
CANDIDATE
 
(
~-oau
C")*-ow
~
il,H-t1UIIrrrn
I
SlH"ttrr-r<lI I I I
~
1!l1 !!
!!
I
-! I
* i ,I: .
iiiI III! iii!
II 1 II
I
orII
I iI iiiI 1111 I
I
r
It ..
I I I!!
I I I'"III!
I' IIi I I I
I
I
C")*-ow
 
(
27. RO 201003K3.03 OOl/MEM/TIG2/85-3/Bl1/201003K3.03/3.6/3.7/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS
Given the following plant conditions:
*
AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure, directs a manual scram based on low reactor pressure.
Which ONE of the following PROCEDURAL reactor pressure limits should be adhered to in this case and
WHY?
A.
980 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due
to the loss of accumulators.
B.oI
900 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due
to the loss of accumulators.
C.
445 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure required to lift a control rod
blade.
D.
800 psig reactor pressure, because this is the Technical Specification pressure for scramming
control rods for scram time testing .
KIA Statement:
201003 Control Rod and Drive Mechanism
K3.03 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the CONTROL ROD AND DRIVE
MECHANISM will have on following : Shutdown margin
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of CRD mechanism limitations and the basis for that limitation related to the ability to effect
and maintain shutdown margin.
References:
1/2/3-AOI-85-3, OPL 171.005, OPL171.006
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
 
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
(
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. The minimum pressure allowed by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
2. The basis for that minimum pressure.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because 980 psig is the setpoint for the Low Accumulator Pressure
alarm.
B is correct.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure
specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure
specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.
 
OPL171.006
Revision 9
Page 17 of 60
C
(a)
A specific pattern of control rod
withdrawal or insertion
(b)
Written step-by-step path used by
the operator in establishing the
expected rod pattern and flux
shape at rated power
(c)
Deviation from the established
path could result in potentially
high control rod worths
(9) Shutdown margin
OBJ. V.B.15.c
(a)
Technical specifications of the
plant require knowing whether the
plant can be shutdown to a safe
level
(b)
Without the insertion capability of
Obj. V.B.20.g
all control rods, shutdown margin
will not be as great, thus closer to
an inadvertent criticality
(10)
Control Rod Worth variables
(a)
Moderator temperature
OBJ. V.8.20.e
i.
As temperature rises,
SER 3-05
slowing down length and
thermal diffusion length
increase
ii.
Rod worth increases with
as moderator temperature
increases
(b)
Void effects on rod worth
i.
As voids increase, average
neutron flux energy
increases
ii.
U238 and Pu240 will
(
capture more epithermal
neutrons through
resonance
 
(
BFN
CRD System Failure
1-AOI-85-3
Unit 1
Rev. 0003
Page 7 of 11
4.1
Immediate Actions (continued)
[2]
IF operating CRD PUMP has tripped AND backup CRD PUMP
is NOT available, THEN (Otherwise N/A)
PERFORM the following at Panel 1-9-5:
[2.1 ]
PLACE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11 ,
in MAN at minimum setting.
D
[2.2]
ATTEMPT TO RESTART tripped CRD Pump using one
of the following:
*
CRD PUMP 1B, using 1-HS-85-2A
*
CRD Pump 1A, using 1-HS-85-1A
D
[2.3]
ADJUST CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,
1-FIC-85-11, to establish the following conditions:
*
CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 1-PDI-85-18A,
approximately 20 psid.
D
*
CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11,
between 40 and 65 gpm.
D
[2.4]
BALANCE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,
1-FIC-85-11 , and PLACE in AUTO or BALANCE.
D
[3]
IF Reactor Pressure is less than 900 psig AND either of the
following conditions exists:
*
In-service CRD Pump tripped and neither CRD Pump can
be started , OR
*
Charging Water Pressure can NOT be restored and
maintained above 940 psig, THEN
PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)
[3.1]
[3.2]
MANUALLY SCRAM Reactor and IMMEDIATELY
PLACE the Reactor Mode Switch in the SHUTDOWN
position.
REFER TO 1-AOI-100-1. [Item 020]
D
D
 
OPL 171.006
Revision 9
Page 30 of 60
(
(6)
The withdraw motion is terminated prior
to reaching the desired position and the
rod is settled as discussed earlier.
d.
Cooling water is continuously supplied via the
P-under port and insert header.
(1)
Flow from plug type orifice in flange
follows passage between outer tube and
thermal sleeve to outer screen.
(2)
Cooling water is required to protect the
OBJ. V.B.18
graphitar seals from high reactor
temperatures.
(3)
Long exposures at high temperatures will
result in brittle, fast- wearing seals.
(4)
Drive temperature should be maintained
at <350&deg;F and the cause should be
investigated if it exceeds this value.
(5)
Concern is that the high temperature
may be caused by a leaking scram
discharge valve.
(6)
This problem should be corrected as
soon as possible to prevent damage to
the valve.
e.
Scram function
(1)
There are two sources of water that can
OBJ. V.B/E.11,
be used to scram a drive: reactor water
V.D.10
and accumulator water.
(2)
Reactor water scram feature
(a)
Reactor water, if at high enough
pressure, is capable of scramming
More on required
the drive without any accumulator
the drive without any accumulator
amount of assistance.
amount of
pressuretolift drive and control(b)The over-pistonareais openedtorodlaterinLP
assistance.
.thescram discharge header.  
pressure to lift
((2)Theprimaryeffectisreduced
drive and control
10oftheinnertubejustbelowthebottomofthecolletpiston.(a)Inseriousoverpressuresituations,thissqueezestheinnertubeagainstthecircumferenceoftheindextube.(b)Theindextubeisthenheldintheinsertovertravelpositionandoftencannotbewithdrawn.
(b)
OPL171.006Revision9 Page 35of60(3)Bulgingoftheindextubeasdescribedabovealsooccurs
The over-piston area is opened to
.b.Extensiveproceduralcontrolsarespecifiedtopreventimpropervalvingofthehydraulic
rod later in LP.
module.c.Particularcautionshouldbeobservedduringthestartuptestprogram.3.ScramCapabilitya.Pistonareas(1)Under-pistonareaequals4.0in
the scram discharge header.
2.(2)Over-pistonareaequals2.8in
 
2.b.Normalscramforces(1)Duringanormalscramcondition,theover-pistonareaisopenedtothescramdischargevolumewhichisinitiallyatatmosphericpressure.
(
(2)Accumulatorand/orreactorpressureissimultaneouslyappliedtothepistonarea.Thenetinitialforceappliedtothedrive(takingnocreditfortheaccumulator)canbecalculatedas
(2)
follows.Fnet=(ForcesUp)-(ForcesDown)  
The primary effect is reduced 10 of the
(Fnet=(RxPressurexUnder-PistonArea)(RxPressurexAreaofIndexTube
inner tube just below the bottom of the
+WeightofBlade
collet piston.
+Friction)Fnet=(1000psigx4.0in
(a)
2)-[1000psigx(4.0 in 2-1.2 in 2)]-255Ibs-500IbsFnet=4000-2800-255-500OPL171.006Revision9Page36of60
In serious overpressure situations,
Note:4in 2upwardforce1.2in 2downwardforce
this squeezes the inner tube
=2.8 in 2 Fnet=445Ibs (Upward)c.Singlefailureproof-Thereisno
against the circumference of the
single-modefailuretothehydraulicsystemwhichwould
index tube.
preventthedrivefromscramming
(b)
.d.Accumulatorversusreactorvesselpressure
The index tube is then held in the
scrams (1)TP-9representsaplotof90percentscramtimesversusreactorpressure
insert overtravel position and often
.(a)Reactorpressureonly (b)Accumulatorpressureonly(c)Combinedreactorand
cannot be withdrawn.
accumulator
OPL171 .006
pressure TP-9(2)Scramtimesaremeasuredforonlythefirst90%oftherodinsertionsincethebufferholesatthetopendofthestrokeslowthedrive
Revision 9
.(3)Reactor-pressure-only
Page 35 of 60
scram(a)AscanbeseenfromTP-9,thedrivecannotbescrammedwithreactorpressure400psig.(b)Thenetinitialupwardforceavailabletoscramthedrivecanbecalculatedasfollows.  
(3)
OPL 171.006Revision9Page38of60
Bulging of the index tube as described
(e.Average scram times (normal drive)TP-9(1)Technical Specifications
above also occurs.
state that scram timesaretobe obtained without relianceontheCRD pumps.(2)Consequently, the charging water must be valved outonthe drivetobe tested.(3)Maximum scram time for a typical drive occursat800psig reactor pressure.(4)Thisis why Technical Specifications
b.
specify that scram timesaretobe takenat800psigor
Extensive procedural controls are specified to
greater reactor pressure.f.Abnormal scram conditions(1)Scram outlet valve failure to open(2)Drivewill
prevent improper valving of the hydraulic
slowly scramonseal leakageaslongas accumulator
module.
charging water pressure stays greater than reactor pressure.(3)Ifthe accumulatorisnot available, the drivewillnot scram(thisisa double failure).g.Control Rods failure to Insert After ScramObj.V.D.11(1)This conditioncouldbe due to hydraulic lock.(2)Procedure has operator close theSee2-01-85
c.
&2-Withdraw Riser Isolation valve.ConnectEOIApp-1E for drain hose to Withdraw Riser Vent Test detailed Connectiononthe affected HCU.Slowly operations
Particular caution should be observed during
open Withdraw Riser Vent.When inward motion has stopped, close Withdraw Self Check Riser Vent.Peer Check  
the startup test program.
((28.RO201006K4
3.
.09 OOl/MEM/T2G2/RWM//201006K4.09/3.2/3.2/RO/SR0/11/l6/07
Scram Capability
RMSTheRodWorth
a.
Minimizermustbe INITIALIZEDtoproperlydeterminerodpositionandsequence
Piston areas
.WhichONEofthefollowing
(1)
describeshowRWMSystem
Under-piston area equals 4.0 in2.
INITIALIZATION
(2)
is accomplished?
Over-piston area equals 2.8 in2.
A.INITIALIZATION
b.
occurs automaticallywhentheRWMis
Normal scram forces
unbypassed
(1)
.B.INITIALIZATION
During a normal scram condition, the
occurs automaticallyevery5secondswhileinthetransitionzone
over-piston area is opened to the scram
.C.oI INITIALIZATIONmustbe performedmanuallyusingthe
discharge volume which is initially at
INITIALIZATION
atmospheric pressure.
push-buttonwhentheRWMis unbypassed
(2)
.D.INITIALIZATIONmustbe performedmanuallyusingthe
Accumulator and/or reactor pressure is
INITIALIZATION
simultaneously applied to the under-
push-buttonwhenpowerdropsbelowtheLPSP.
piston area. The net initial force applied
KIA Statement:201006RWM K4.09-KnowledgeofROD
to the drive (taking no credit for the
WORTH MINIMIZERSYSTEM(RWM)(PLANT SPECIFIC)designfeature(s)and/orinterlockswhichprovideforthefollowing
accumulator) can be calculated as
:Systeminitialization
follows.
: P-Spec(Not-BWR6)
Fnet =(Forces Up) - (Forces Down)
KIA Justification:Thisquestion
 
satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
(
candidatetousespecificofwhichplantconditionwould
Fnet = (Rx Pressure x Under-Piston Area) -
INITIALIZEtheRWM.References:1/2/3-01-85,OPL171.024
(Rx Pressure x Area of Index Tube
Level of Knowledge Justification:ThisquestionisratedasMEMduetothe
+ Weight of Blade + Friction)
requirementtorecallorrecognizediscretebitsof
Fnet =(1000 psig x 4.0 in2) - [1000 psig
information.0610NRCExam
x (4.0 in2 - 1.2 in2)] - 255 Ibs -
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
- 500 Ibs
Analysis:Inordertoanswerthis
Fnet = 4000 - 2800 - 255 - 500
question correctlythecandidatemust
OPL171.006
determinethefollowing
Revision 9
: 1.WhenRWM INITIALIZATIONisrequired
Page 36 of 60
.2.HowRWM INITIALIZATION
Note: 4 in2
is accomplished
upward force -
.Ais incorrect.Thisis plausible becauseinitializationisrequiredwhentheRWMis
1.2 in2
unbypassed,butthismustbedonemanually.Bis incorrect.Thisis plausible becausetheRWM automaticallyinitiatesa"scanllatch"todeterminethecorrectlatchedrodgroup,butthisisnotthesameas
downward force
INITIALIZATION.Cis correct.Dis incorrect.Thisis plausible becausetheRWMmustbe
= 2.8 in2
manually INITIALIZED
Fnet = 445 Ibs
,buttheRWMdoesnotrequireinitialization
(Upward)
becausetheLPSPisreached
c.
.THeRWMwill
Single failure proof - There is no single-mode
automaticallyperforma"scanllatch"atthatpoint.  
failure to the hydraulic system which would
OPL171.024Revision13Page19of53
prevent the drive from scramming .
(INSTRUCTOR
d.
NOTES(2)The MANUAL indicatorlightwillthenbeObj.V.B.6litandallerrorandalarm
Accumulator versus reactor vessel pressure
indicationsthatwereonpriorto
scrams
bypasswillbeblankedoutontheRWMsystem
(1 )
displays.(3)AmanualbypasswillalsolighttheRWMandPROGR
TP-9 represents a plot of 90 percent
indicatoronthe RWM-COMP-PROGR-BUFF
scram times versus reactor pressure.
(a)
Reactor pressure only
(b)
Accumulator pressure only
(c)
Combined reactor and
accumulator pressure
TP-9
(2)
Scram times are measured for only the
first 90% of the rod insertion since the
buffer holes at the top end of the stroke
slow the drive.
(3)
Reactor-pressure-only scram
(a)
As can be seen from TP-9, the
drive cannot be scrammed with
reactor pressure ~ 400 psig.
(b)
The net initial upward force
available to scram the drive can
be calculated as follows.
 
OPL171.006
Revision 9
Page 38 of 60
(
e.
Average scram times (normal drive)
TP-9
(1)
Technical Specifications state that scram
times are to be obtained without reliance
on the CRD pumps.
(2)
Consequently, the charging water must
be valved out on the drive to be tested.
(3)
Maximum scram time for a typical drive
occurs at 800 psig reactor pressure.
(4)
This is why Technical Specifications
specify that scram times are to be taken
at 800 psig or greater reactor pressure.
f.
Abnormal scram conditions
(1)
Scram outlet valve failure to open
(2)
Drive will slowly scram on seal leakage
as long as accumulator charging water
pressure stays greater than reactor
pressure.
(3)
If the accumulator is not available, the
drive will not scram (this is a double
failure).
g.
Control Rods failure to Insert After Scram
Obj. V.D.11
(1)
This condition could be due to hydraulic
lock.
(2)
Procedure has operator close the
See 2-01-85 &2-
Withdraw Riser Isolation valve. Connect
EOI App-1 E for
drain hose to Withdraw Riser Vent Test
detailed
Connection on the affected HCU. Slowly
operations
open Withdraw Riser Vent. When inward
motion has stopped, close Withdraw
Self Check
Riser Vent.
Peer Check
 
(
(
28. RO 201006K4.09 OOl/MEM/T2G2/RWM//201006K4.09/3.2/3.2/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS
The Rod Worth Minimizer must be INITIALIZED to properly determine rod position and sequence.
Which ONE of the following describes how RWM System INITIALIZATION is accomplished?
A.
INITIALIZATION occurs automatically when the RWM is unbypassed.
B.
INITIALIZATION occurs automatically every 5 seconds while in the transition zone.
C.oI INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when the
RWM is unbypassed.
D.
INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when power
drops below the LPSP.
KIA Statement:
201006 RWM
K4.09 - Knowledge of ROD WORTH MINIMIZER SYSTEM (RWM) (PLANT SPECIF IC) design feature(s)
and/or interlocks which provide for the following : System initialization : P-Spec(Not-BWR6)
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific of
which plant condition would INITIALIZE the RWM.
References:
1/2/3-01-85, OPL 171.024
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
1. When RWM INITIALIZATION is required .
2. How RWM INITIALIZATION is accomplished.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because initialization is required when the RWM is unbypassed, but this
must be done manually.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM automatically initiates a "scanllatch" to determine the
correct latched rod group, but this is not the same as INITIALIZATION.
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM must be manually INITIALIZED, but the RWM does
not require initialization because the LPSP is reached. THe RWM will automatically perform a
"scanllatch" at that point.
 
OPL171.024
Revision 13
Page 19 of 53
(
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
(2)
The MANUAL indicator light will then be Obj. V.B.6
lit and all error and alarm indications
that were on prior to bypass will be
blanked out on the RWM system
displays.
(3)
A manual bypass will also light the
RWM and PROGR indicator on the
RWM-COMP-PROGR-BUFF
pushbutton.
pushbutton.
f.SYSTEM INITIALIZE
f.
pushbutton
SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton
switch/indicator(1)TheSYSTEM INITIALIZEswitchis depressed to initializetheRWM system.(2)Initializationmustbe performed whenevertheRWMhasbeentaken
switch/indicator
offline,asoccurs
(1)
whenevertheRWMprogramisabortedor
The SYSTEM INITIALIZE switch is
manually bypassed.(3)Therefore, following any program abortorbypass,the
depressed to initialize the RWM
SYSTEM INITIALIZEswitchmustbe
system.
depressed before theprogramcanberunagain.(4)TheSYSTEM
(2)
INITIALIZE
Initialization must be performed
windowlightswhitewhiletheswitchisheld
whenever the RWM has been taken off
down.g.SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC
line, as occurs whenever the RWM
switch/indicator(1)Thisswitchcanbepressedatanytime
program is aborted or manually
afterthesystemhasbeen
bypassed.
initialized
(3)
to requestthatthe system diagnosticroutinebe performed.
Therefore, following any program abort
(2)TheRWMprogramwill
or bypass, the SYSTEM INITIALIZE
thereupon beinitiatedandwillperformtheroutine,whichconsistsof
switch must be depressed before the
applyingandthenremovingin
program can be run again.
sequence the insert and withdraw blocks (nominal10second frequency).
(4)
(3)The operatorcanverifythe
The SYSTEM INITIALIZE window
operabilityNOTE:Rodinsertoftherodblockcircuitsby
lights white while the switch is held
observingandwithdrawal
down.
(thatthe INSERT BLOCK andpermitlightswillgo
g.
WITHDRAW BLOCKalarmlightscome
SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC switch/indicator
offwhenblockisonandthengo
(1)
offastheblocksareapplied.
This switch can be pressed at any time
((BFN ControlRodDriveSystem
after the system has been initialized to
1-01-85Unit1Rev.0005 Paue136of179 8.18 ReinitializationoftheRodWorth
request that the system diagnostic
Minimizer[1]VERIFYthefollowinginitialconditionsaresatisfied:
routine be performed.
*TheRodWorth
(2)
Minimizer isavailabletobeplacedin
The RWM program will thereupon be
operation D*Integrated
initiated and will perform the routine,
ComputerSystem(ICS)is
which consists of applying and then
available D*The Shift Manager/Reactor
removing in sequence the insert and
Engineer has directed reinitializationoftheRodWorth
withdraw blocks (nominal 10 second
Minimizer D[2]REVIEW all Precautions
frequency).
and LimitationsinSection3.3.
(3)
D[3]VERIFYRWMSWITCHPANEL, 1-XS-85-9025
The operator can verify the operability
in NORMAL.D[4]CHECK the Manual/AutoBypasslightsare
NOTE: Rod insert
extinguished.
of the rod block circuits by observing
D[5]DEPRESSANDHOLD INOP/RESET
and withdrawal
pushbutton.
(
D[6]CHECKallfourlights (RWM/COMP/PROG/BUFF)
that the INSERT BLOCK and
are illuminated.
permit lights will go
D[7]RELEASE INOP/RESETpushbuttonand
WITHDRAW BLOCK alarm lights come
CHECKallfour lights extinguished.
off when block is
D[8]SIMUL TANEOUSLYDEPRESSOUTOF SEQUENCE/SYSTEM
on and then go off as the blocks are
INITIALIZE
applied.
pushbutton
 
and INOP/RESET
(
pushbuttontoplacetheRodWorth
(
Minimizer in service.D[9]IF Rod Worth Minim izer will NOT in itialize, THEN DETERMINE alarmsonRWMDisplayScreenand
BFN
CORRECT problems.D[10]IFunableto correct problems and initialize
Control Rod Drive System
RWM, THEN NOTIFY Reactor Engineer.D  
1-01-85
(BFNControlRodDriveSystem
Unit 1
1-01-85Unit1Rev.0005Page19of179
Rev. 0005
3.3RodWorth Minimizer (RWM)(continued)N.Forgrouplimitsonly,RWMrecognizestheNominalLimitsonly
Paue 136 of 179
.TheNominalLimitistheinsertorwithdrawlimitforthegroupassignedbyRWM.TheAlternateLimitisnolongerrecognizedbytheRWMasanAcceptableGroupLimit.
8.18
O.DuringRWMlatching
Reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer
,thelatchedgroupwillbethehighestnumberedgroupwith2orlessinserterrorsandhavingatleast1rodwithdrawnpastitsinsertlimits
[1 ]
.1.WithSequenceControlON,latchingoccursasfollows:(Normally,startupswillbeperformedwithSequenceControlON)
VERIFY the following initial conditions are satisfied:
a.RWMwilllatchdownwhenallrodsinthepresentlylatchedgrouphavebeeninsertedtothegroupinsertlimitandarodinthenextlowergroupisselected.b.RWMwilllatchupwhenarodwithinthenexthighergroupisselected,providedthatnomorethantwoinserterrorsresult.2.WithSequenceControlOFF,latchingoccursasfollows
*
:a.Fornon-repeatinggroups,latchingoccursasdescribedabove,ORb.Forrepeatinggroups,latchingoccurstothenextsetuporsetdownbasedonrodmovementasopposedtorodselection.P.Latchingoccursatthefollowingtimes:1.Systeminitialization
The Rod Worth Minimizer is available to be placed in
.2.Followinga"SystemDiagnostic"request.
operation
3.When operatordemandsentryorterminationof"RodTest."4.WhenpowerdropsbelowLPAP.5.WhenpowerdropsbelowLPSP.
D
6.Everyfivesecondsinthetransitionzone.7.FollowinganyfullcontrolrodscanwhenpowerisbelowLPAP.8.UpondemandbytheOperator(Scan/LatchRequestfunction).
*
9.Followingcorrectionofinsertorwithdrawerrors.  
Integrated Computer System (ICS) is available
(29.RO 202001K6.09
D
OOl/C/A/T2G2/68-RECIRC/24/202001 K6.09//RO/SROIGiventhefollowingp
*
lant conditions:*Unit3isoperatingat55%
The Shift Manager/Reactor Engineer has directed
powerwithReactorFeedPump(RFP)"A"&"C"runningandRFP"B" idling.*Both RecirculationPumpspeedsare53%
reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer
.*The"A"RFPtrips,resultinginthefollowingconditions:
D
Reactor Water level Abnormalalarmsealedin
[2]
Reactor Vessel WtrLevelLowHalfScramalarmsealedin*Indicated
REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.3.
Reactor WaterLeveldropsto
D
_10"beforeRFP"B"is
[3]
broughtonlinetoreversetheleveltrendandlevelisstabilizedat33".WhichONEofthefollowing
VERIFY RWM SWITCH PANEL, 1-XS-85-9025 in NORMAL.
describesthesteadystateconditionofboth
D
Recirculation
[4]
Pumps?A.Runningat53%speed
CHECK the Manual/Auto Bypass lights are extinguished.
B.Runningat45%speed
D
c.Y'Runningat28%speed
[5]
D.Trippedon ATWS/RPT signal.KIA Statement:202001Recirculation
DEPRESS AND HOLD INOP/RESET pushbutton.
K6.09-Knowledgeofthe
D
effectthatalossor
[6]
malfunct ionofthefollow
CHECK all four lights (RWM/COMP/PROG/BUFF) are
ingwillhaveonthe
illuminated.
RECIRCULATION
D
SYSTEM: Reactor water level KIA Justification:
[7]
Th is question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
RELEASE INOP/RESET pushbutton and CHECK all four
candidatetousespecificplantconditionsandtimesto
lights extinguished.
determine the effectofa change in reactor waterlevelontheRecirculation
D
System.References:
[8]
3-01-68 ,OPL171.007,OPL171.012 Level of Knowledge Justification:
SIMULTANEOUSLY DEPRESS OUT OF
Th is quest ionisratedas CIAduetothe requirementtoassemble
SEQUENCE/SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton and
, sort , and integratethepartsofthequestiontopredictanoutcome.Th
INOP/RESET pushbutton to place the Rod Worth Minimizer in
is requires menta llyusingth isknowledgeanditsmeaningto
service.
predict the correct outcome.0610NRCExam
D
(l REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
[9]
Analysis:Inordertoanswerthisquestion
IF Rod Worth Minimizer will NOT initialize, THEN
correctlythecandidatemust
DETERMINE alarms on RWM Display Screen and CORRECT
determinethefollowing:
problems.
1.Didplant conditionsexceedtheRecirc
D
Runback setpoint.2.WhichRunbackis
[10]
appropriateforthegivenconditions.Ais incorrect.
IF unable to correct problems and initialize RWM, THEN
Total Feedflowwoulddropbelow19%withonlyoneRFPrunningat55%ratedpower,thusinitiatingaRecirc
NOTIFY Reactor Engineer.
Runbackto28%.Thisisplausiblebasedontheinitial
D
powerlevelbeingcloseenoughtocreate
 
doubtontotal feedflowresultingfromthetripofoneRFP
(
.Bis incorrect.
BFN
This i s plausiblebecauseaRecircRunbackDIDoccur,butthe45%speedgiveninthe
Control Rod Drive System
distractoristhetypicalspeedtheRecircPumpsrunatduringstartup
1-01-85
,notfollowingaRFPtrip
Unit 1
.Cis correct.Dis incorrect.
Rev. 0005
Th is is plausible because ATWS/RPTsignalsare
Page 19 of 179
associatedwithlowRPVlevel,howeverthesetpointis-45inchesandlevelonlyloweredto-10
3.3
inches.
Rod Worth Minimizer (RWM) (continued)
(BFN Reactor Recirculation
N.
System 3-01-68 Unit 3Rev.0066Page13 of 1793.0PRECAUTIONSANDLIMITATIONS (continued)10.TheoutofservicepumpmayNOTbestartedunlessthe
For group limits only, RWM recognizes the Nominal Limits only. The Nominal
temperatureofthecoolantbetweentheoperatingandidleRecircloopsarewithin50&deg;Fofeachother.This50&deg;FdeltaTlimitisbasedonstressanalysisforreactornozzles,stressanalysisforreactorrecirculation
Limit is the insert or withdraw limit for the group assigned by RWM. The
componentsandpiping,andfuelthermallimits
Alternate Limit is no longer recognized by the RWM as an Acceptable
.[GE Sll517Supplement1]11.TheoutofservicepumpmayNOTbestartedunlessthereactorisverifiedoutsideofregions1,2and3oftheUnit3PowertoFlowMap(ICSorStationReactorEngineering,0-TI-248).12.The temperatureofthecoolantbetweenthedomeandtheidleRecircloopshouldbemaintainedwithin75&deg;Fofeachother.Ifthislimitcannotbe
Group Limit.
maintainedaplantcooldownshouldbeinitiated
O.
.FailuretomaintainthislimitandNOTcooldowncouldresultinhangers
During RWM latching, the latched group will be the highest numbered
and/orshocksuppressers
group with 2 or less insert errors and having at least 1 rod withdrawn past its
exceedingtheirmaximumtravelrange.
insert limits.
[GE SIl251,430and517]M.RecircPump
1.
controllerlimitsareasfollows:1.WhenanyindividualRFPflowislessthan19%andreactor
With Sequence Control ON, latching occurs as follows: (Normally, startups
waterlevelisbelow27inches,speedlimitissetto
will be performed with Sequence Control ON)
75%(-1130RPMspeed)andifspeed
a.
is greater than 75%(-1130RPMspeed),Recircspeedwillrunbackto
RWM will latch down when all rods in the presently latched
75%(-1130RPMspeed).2.Whentotalfeed
group have been inserted to the group insert limit and a rod in the next
waterflowislessthan19%(15secTD)orRecircPump
lower group is selected.
dischargevalveislessthan90%open,speedlimitissetto28%
b.
(-480RPMspeed)andifspeedis
RWM will latch up when a rod within the next higher group is selected,
greater than 28%(-480RPMspeed),Recircspeedwillrunbackto
provided that no more than two insert errors result.
28%(-480RPMspeed).  
2.
(BFN Reactor Recirculation
With Sequence Control OFF, latching occurs as follows:
System 3-01-68 Unit 3 Rev.0066Page15 of 179 3.0PRECAUTIONSANDLIMITATIONS (continued)
a.
R.ThepowersuppliestotheMMRandDFRrelaysarelistedbelow
For non-repeating groups, latching occurs as described above, OR
.VFD3AI&CBUSA(BKR215)ICSPNL532(BKR30)UNITPFD(BKR615)
b.
VFD3BI&CBUSB(BKR315)
For repeating groups, latching occurs to the next setup or set down
ICSPNL532(BKR26)UNITPFD(BKR616)
based on rod movement as opposed to rod selection.
3-RLY-068-MMR3/A
P.
&DFR3/A 3-RL Y-068-MMR2/A
Latching occurs at the following times:
&DFR2/A 3-RL Y-068-MMR1/A
1.
&DFR1/A 3-RLY-068-MMR3/B&DFR3/B 3-RL Y-068-MMR2/B&DFR2/B 3-RLY-068-MMR1/B&DFR1/B (S.AcompletelistofRecircSystemtripfunctionsisprovidedinIllustration4.The
System initialization.
RPT breakersbetweentherecircdrivesandpumpmotorswillopenonanyofthefollowing:1.ReactordomePressure1148psig (ATWS/RPT).(Bothpressure
2.
switchesinLogicAorbothpressure
Following a "System Diagnostic" request.
switchesinLogicBwillcauseRPT
3.
breakerstotripbothpumps
When operator demands entry or termination of "Rod Test."
.)(2outof2takenoncelogic)
4.
2.Reactor WaterLevels-45"(ATWS/RPT)
When power drops below LPAP.
.(BothlevelswitchesinLogicAorbothlevel
5.
switchesinLevelBwillcauseRPTbreakerstotripbothpumps.)(2outof2takenoncelogic)
When power drops below LPSP.
3.Turbinetriporloadrejectcondition,when30%powerbyturbinefirst
6.
stage pressure (EOC/RPT).1.TheA TWS/RPTA(B)logictotriptheRPT
Every five seconds in the transition zone.
breakersisdefeatedifthe
7.
ATWS/RPT/ARIA(B)manuallogicisarmedusingthearmingcollaronPanel3-9-5
Following any full control rod scan when power is below LPAP.
.B(A)logicwouldstillbefunctionalandtriptheRPTbreakersifthesetpointsarereached.Ifbothmanual
8.
push-buttonson3-9-5arearmed, A TWS/RPT automaticlogicistotallydefeated(noRPT
Upon demand by the Operator (Scan/Latch Request function).
breakertripwilloccuriftheA TWS/RPTtripsetpointsarereached)
9.
.EOC/RPTlogicandATWS/ARIlogicwillfunction
Following correction of insert or withdraw errors.
withoutregardtothepositionofthearmingcollars.ATWS/RPT/ARIlogiccanbereset30secondsafter
 
setpointsarereset.  
(
((30.RO 215001Al.Ol
29. RO 202001K6.09 OOl/C/A/T2G2/68 - RECIRC/24/202001 K6.09//RO/SROI
OOlIMEMlTIG2/TIPI121500IAl.Ol//RO/SROIWhichONEofthefollowing
Given the following plant conditions:
describestheprocedural
*
requirements
Unit 3 is operating at 55% power with Reactor Feed Pump (RFP) "A" & "C" running and RFP "B"
in accordancewith2-01-94
idling.
,TraversingIn-CoreProbeSystemwhilerunningTIPtraces?
*
A.TheTIP detectorshallbe withdrawntotheIn-ShieldpositionandtheballvalveclosedfollowingeachTIPtrace
Both Recirculation Pump speeds are 53%.
.8.RunningaTIPtracewhile
*
personnelareworkinginsidetheDrywellisprohibited
The "A" RFP trips, resulting in the following conditions:
.C."TheRadiationProtectionShift
Reactor Water level Abnormal alarm sealed in
SupervisorisrequiredtobenotifiedpriortoTIPSystemoperation.
Reactor Vessel Wtr Level Low Half Scram alarm sealed in
D.TheTIP Machine will automatically
*
withdrawtothein-shieldposition,thentheballvalvewill
Indicated Reactor Water Level drops to _10" before RFP "B" is brought on line to reverse the level
automaticallyclosefollowingaPCISGroup6isolation
trend and level is stabilized at 33".
.KIA Statement:
Which ONE of the following describes the steady state condition of both Recirculation Pumps?
215001 Traversing
A.
In-core ProbeA1.01-Abilityto
Running at 53% speed
predict and/or monitorchangesin parameters
B.
associatedwithoperatingthe
Running at 45% speed
TRAVERSING
c.Y' Running at 28% speed
IN-CORE PROBE controls including:Radiationlevels
D.
: (Not-BWR1)
Tripped on ATWS/RPT signal.
KIA Justification:Thisquestion
KIA Statement:
satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
202001 Recirculation
candidate to determine theoperatinglimitationsoftheTIP
K6.09 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the
systemwithrespecttohighradiation
RECIRCULATION SYSTEM: Reactor water level
.References:
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
2-01-94 Precautions
plant conditions and times to determine the effect of a change in reactor water level on the Recirculation
&Limitations
System.
Level of Knowledge Justification:ThisquestionisratedasMEMduetothe
References: 3-01-68, OPL 171.007, OPL171.012
requirementtorecallorrecognizediscretebitsof
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
information.0610NRCExam
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
Analysis:Inorderto answerthisquestion
0610 NRC Exam
correctlythecandidatemust
 
determinethefollowing
(
:1.LimitationsforrunningTIP
l
traceswithpersonnelintheDrywell.2.Notification
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
requirements
Plausibility Analysis:
priortorunningTIPs
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
.3.WhichPCISGroupwill
1. Did plant conditions exceed the Recirc Runback setpoint.
causeaTIPretractionandisolation
2. Which Runback is appropriate for the given conditions.
.4.Requirementsforrunning
A is incorrect. Total Feedflow would drop below 19% with only one RFP running at 55% rated power,
multiple simultaneous
thus initiating a Recirc Runback to 28%. This is plausible based on the initial power level being close
TIP traces.Ais incorrect.Thisis plausible becausethatlimitationisplacedonTIPoperation,butonlywhenTIPoperationisno
enough to create doubt on total feedflow resulting from the trip of one RFP.
longerrequired.TheTIP
B is incorrect. This is plausible because a Recirc Runback DID occur, but the 45% speed given in the
detectorcanbestoredinthe
distractor is the typical speed the Recirc Pumps run at during startup , not following a RFP trip.
Indexerin-betweentracesusingthesameTIP
C is correct.
Machine for ALARA concerns.8is incorrect.Thisis plausible because specific permission
D is incorrect. This is plausible because ATWS/RPT signals are associated with low RPV level, however
and controlsarerequiredtoallowthiscondition,butitisallowable.Cis correct.Dis incorrect.Thisis plausible becausetheTIPresponsetoaPCISisolationiscorrect,butitisnotaGroup6isolation
the setpoint is -45 inches and level only lowered to -10 inches.
.  
 
(BFN Traversing
(
Incore Probe System 2-01-94 Unit2 Rev.0029 Page 7 of 26 3.0 PRECAUTIONS
BFN
AND LIMITATIONS
Reactor Recirculation System
A.[NER/C]Verificationofadigitin
3-01-68
CORELIMITand DETECTOR POSITION windows priortoorduringTIPinsertion
Unit 3
ensures TIPsretaintheabilityto
Rev. 0066
determine its properposition.Thiswill
Page 13 of 179
prevent malfunctionswhichcould
3.0
damagetheTIP detector.[GESIL-166]
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
B.To prevent accidental
10. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the temperature of the
exposuretopersonnel
coolant between the operating and idle Recirc loops are within 50&deg;F of
, immediately
each other. This 50&deg;F delta T limit is based on stress analysis for reactor
evacuatetheareaiftheTIPdrivearearadiation
nozzles, stress analysis for reactor recirculation components and piping,
monitor alarms.C.[NER/C]Always observe READY light illuminated
and fuel thermal limits.
prior to inserting detector.[GE SIL-166]D.(NERlC]DONOTmove CHANNEL SELECTswitchwith
[GE Sll517 Supplement 1]
detectorinsertedpast
11. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the reactor is verified
Indexer position(0001).Thecommonchannel
outside of regions 1, 2 and 3 of the Unit 3 Power to Flow Map (ICS or
interlockcanbe defeatedinthis manner resulting in detector and equipment damage.[GESIL-092]E.(NERlC]Should detectorfailto shifttoslowspeed
Station Reactor Engineering, 0-TI-248).
when it entersthecore,the
12. The temperature of the coolant between the dome and the idle Recirc loop
LOWswitchshouldbeturnedon, switched to manualmode,andthe
should be maintained within 75&deg;F of each other. If this limit cannot be
detector withdrawn.[GESIL-166]
maintained a plant cooldown should be initiated. Failure to maintain this
F.[NER/C]Length of time detectorisleftincoreshouldbe
limit and NOT cooldown could result in hangers and/or shock suppressers
minimizedtolimit act ivation of detectorandcable.[GESIL-166]
exceeding their maximum travel range.
G.(NERlC]WhenTIP System operationisnotdesired, detectorsshouldberetractedandstoredin
[GE SIl251, 430 and 517]
chambershieldwithballvalvesclosed
M.
.[GESIL-166]
Recirc Pump controller limits are as follows:
Storage of detector in Indexer(0001)isallowedonlyfor
1.
ALARA concernsandto prevent unnecessary
When any individual RFP flow is less than 19% and reactor water level is
masking of multipleinputsto annunciatorRXBLDG AREA RADIATIONHIGH2-RA-90-1D
below 27 inches, speed limit is set to 75%(-1130 RPM speed) and if speed
(2-XA-55-3A, Window 22)..H.[NER/C]Upon receiptofaPCISsignal(low
is greater than 75%(-1130 RPM speed), Recirc speed will run back to
reactor waterlevelorhighdrywellpressure),any
75%(-1130 RPM speed).
detector insertedbeyonditsshield
2.
chambershouldbeverifiedto
When total feed water flow is less than 19% (15 sec TD) or Recirc Pump
automatically
discharge valve is less than 90% open, speed limit is set to 28%
shift to reversemodeandbegin
(-480 RPM speed) and if speed is greater than 28%(-480 RPM speed),
withdrawal.Onceinshield,ballandpurge valves close.[GESIL-166]Ballvalve cannot be reopeneduntilPCISisresetonPanel2-9-4andmanualresetofTIP
Recirc speed will run back to 28%(-480 RPM speed).
ISOLATION RESET pushbutton
 
2-HS-94-7D/S2
(
locatedonPanel2-9-13.I.A detector should not be abruptly stopped from fastspeedtooff
BFN
without first switching to slow speed.J.[NER/C]Drive ControlUnits(DCU)shouldbe
Reactor Recirculation System
monitored during withdrawal
3-01-68
to prevent any chamber shield withdrawallimitfrombeing
Unit 3
overrun.Detectorsshouldbe stopped manuallyatshieldlimitifautostoplimitswitchshouldfailandverifyballvalvecloses.[GESIL-166]K.OnlyoneTIPatatime
Rev. 0066
should be operated when maintenanceisbeing performedinTIPdrivearea.
Page 15 of 179
(l BFN Traversing
3.0
Incore Probe System 2-01-94 Unit2Rev.0029 Page 8 of 26 3.0 PRECAUTIONS
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
R.
L.[NRC/CJDONOToperateTIPswithpersonnelinsideTIPRoomorinvicinityofTIPtubingandIndexersinDrywell
The power supplies to the MMR and DFR relays are listed below.
.RequirementmaybewaivedwithapprovalofShift ManagerandsiteRADCON
VFD3A
manager or designee.Inthisinstance,RADCONisrequiredtoestablishsuchcontrolsasare
I&C BUS A (BKR 215)
necessarytopreventaccesstoTIPtubingandIndexerareastopreclude
ICS PNL 532 (BKR 30)
unnecessaryexposuretopersonnelworkinginDrywell.RADCONField
UNIT PFD (BKR 615)
Operations
VFD3B
Shift Supervisor
I&C BUS B (BKR 315)
isrequiredtobenotifiedpriortooperationofTIPSystem.[NRCInformationNotice88-063, Supplement
ICS PNL 532 (BKR 26)
2J M.Nochannelshouldbeindexedtocommonchannel10unlessallotherchannelsarenotindexedtochannel10andalltheirREADYlightsareilluminated
UNIT PFD (BKR 616)
.N.[NERlC]DONOTturnMODEswitchtoOFFonDriveControlUnit
3-RLY-068-MMR3/A & DFR3/A
ifdetectorisoutsideshield
3-RLY-068-MMR2/A & DFR2/A
chamberunlesspersonnelsafetyrequiresit.
3-RLY-068-MMR1/A & DFR1/A
[GE SIL-166J This removes powerpreventingautomatic
3-RLY-068-MMR3/B & DFR3/B
withdrawalonPCISsignalandcausingballvalvestocloseoncableordetector.TipBallValves
3-RLY-068-MMR2/B & DFR2/B
CANNOTfullyclose
3-RLY-068-MMR1/B & DFR1/B
and shearvalvesmayhavetobeactuated
(
.O.CHANNEL SELECTswitchesonDriveControlUnitsshouldalwaysberotated
S.
in clockwisedirectionwhenselectingchannels.
A complete list of Recirc System trip functions is provided in Illustration 4. The
P.Connectoronshearvalve
RPT breakers between the recirc drives and pump motors will open on any of
indicatorcircuitshouldnotberemovedwhiletestingshearvalveexplosivechargesorperforming
the following:
shear valve maintenance
1.
with detectorinserted.Thiswillcausean
Reactor dome Pressure ~ 1148 psig (ATWS/RPT). (Both pressure
automatic detector withdrawal.
switches in Logic A or both pressure switches in Logic B will cause RPT
Q.Continuous
breakers to trip both pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)
voice communicationshouldbe maintainedbetweenTIPoperator
2.
or maintenancepersonnelincontrolroomanddrive
Reactor Water Level s -45" (ATWS/RPT) . (Both level switches in Logic A
mechanismareawhile maintenanceisbeingperformedandTIP
or both level switches in Level B will cause RPT breakers to trip both
detectordrivingis necessary.R.Each applicableballvalveshouldbeopenedpriortooperatingthatTIP
pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)
machine.S.TIPDrive
3.
MechanismsandIndexersshouldhave
Turbine trip or load reject condition, when ~ 30% power by turbine first
continuouspurgesupplyunlessrequiredtoberemovedfromservicefor
stage pressure (EOC/RPT) .
maintenance.T.Duringoutageswhen
1.
containmentisdeinertedfor
The ATWS/RPT A(B) logic to trip the RPT breakers is defeated if the
personnelaccess,TIP
ATWS/RPT/ARI A(B) manual logic is armed using the arming collar on
Indexerpurgesupplyshouldbetransferredfrom
Panel 3-9-5. B(A) logic would still be functional and trip the RPT breakers if the
nitrogentoControlAirforpersonnelsafety.
setpoints are reached. If both manual push-buttons on 3-9-5 are armed,
U.Detector damageispossibleifTIPballvalveisleftopen
ATWS/RPT automatic logic is totally defeated (no RPT breaker trip will occur if
,orisopenedduring
the ATWS/RPT trip setpoints are reached). EOC/RPT logic and ATWS/ARI
DRYWELL PRESSURETEST.(GESIL-166)
logic will function without regard to the position of the arming collars.
((31.RO 216000K l.l O 00l/MEM/T2G2/PR.INSTRJ9/216000Kl.lO
ATWS/R PT/ARI logic can be reset 30 seconds after setpoints are reset.
//RO/SRO/Wh ichONEofthefollowingindicateshowraisingrecirculation
 
flow affects the EmergencySystemRange
(
indica tors(3-58A-58B)andNa
(
rrowRangeIndicators(e.g., L1-3-53)onPanel9-5?
30. RO 215001Al.Ol OOlIMEMlTIG2/TIPI121500IAl.Ol//RO/SROI
A.Noeffecton
Which ONE of the following describes the procedural requirements in accordance with 2-01-94,
Emergency SystemRange;NarrowRangewillindicate
Traversing In-Core Probe System while running TIP traces?
higher.B.Emergency SystemRangewillindicatehigher;NarrowRangewillnotbe
A.
affected.C.Both EmergencySystemRangeandNarrowRangewill
The TIP detector shall be withdrawn to the In-Shield position and the ball valve closed following
indicate lower.D.oIEmergencySystemRangewillindicatelowerandNarrowRangewillnotbeaffected.
each TIP trace.
KIA Statement:216000Nuclear
8.
Boiler Inst K1.10-Knowledgeofthephysical
Running a TIP trace while personnel are working inside the Drywell is prohibited.
connectionsand/orcause-
C." The Radiation Protection Shift Supervisor is required to be notified prior to TIP System operation.
effect relationshipsbetweenNUCLEAR
D.
BOILER INSTRUMENTATIONandthefollowing
The TIP Machine will automatically withdraw to the in-shield position, then the ball valve will
:Recirculationflowcontrol
automatically close following a PCIS Group 6 isolation.
system KIA Justification:
KIA Statement:
This quest ionsatisfiestheKIA
215001 Traversing In-core Probe
statementbyrequiringthe
A1.01 - Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the
candidatetousespecific
TRAVERSING IN-CORE PROBE controls including: Radiation levels: (Not-BWR1)
know ledgeofthe effect of changesinRecirculationflowon
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to determine the
reactor water level instrumentation.
operating limitations of the TIP system with respect to high radiation .
References:OPL171.003 Level of Knowledge Justificat
References:
ion:ThisquestionisratedasMEMduetotherequ
2-01-94 Precautions & Limitations
irementtorecallorrecogn ize d iscretebitsof information.0610NRCExam
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
or recognize discrete bits of information.
Analysis:Inordertoanswerthis
0610 NRC Exam
question correctly the candidate must determine the effectofraising Rec ircflowonNormalRangeand
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Emergency SystemsRangelevel
Plausibility Analysis:
instrumentation.Ais incorrect.Thisis plausible becauseNarrowRange
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
instrumentsmayreadslightlyh
1. Limitations for running TIP traces with personnel in the Drywell.
igheratcolderconditions,butthisdoesNOTapplytoRecircflowchanges.Bis incorrect.Thisis plausible becauseNarrowRange
2. Notification requirements prior to running TIPs.
instrumentsarenoteffectedbyRec
3. Which PCIS Group will cause a TIP retraction and isolation.
irc Flow changes , but Emergency Sys tem Range isntrumentswillreadlower.Cis incorrect.
4. Requirements for running multiple simultaneous TIP traces.
Th isisplaus ible because EmergencySystemRange
A is incorrect. This is plausible because that limitation is placed on TIP operation, but only when TIP
instruments
operation is no longer required. The TIP detector can be stored in the Indexer in-between traces using
w illreadlower,buttheNarrowRange
the same TIP Machine for ALARA concerns.
instrumentswillnot.Dis correct.
8 is incorrect. This is plausible because specific permission and controls are required to allow this
(d.Fourrangesoflevel
condition, but it is allowable.
indicationOPL171.003Revision17Page20of54
C is correct.
INSTRUCTOR
D is incorrect. This is plausible because the TIP response to a PCIS isolation is correct, but it is not a
NOTES Normal Control Range (Narrow Range)(1)(a)oto+60 inchrange cover ing the normal operat ing range (analog)with+60"upto+70"digitaland0"downto-10"digital
Group 6 isolation.
readings.Obj.V.B.5Obj.V.B.6TP-3showsonlyanalogscale (b)Referenced
 
to instrument
(
zero (c)Four of these instruments
BFN
areusedby Feedwater Level Control System (FWLCS).Thelevel s ignal utilizedbythe FWLCS isnotd irected throughtheAnalog Trip System.i.Temperature
Traversing Incore Probe System
compensatedbya pressure signal Obj.V.B.11.Obj.V.B.13.(ii.Most accurate level indication
2-01-94
availabletothe operator iii.Calibrated
Unit2
for normal operating pressure and temperature (d)These indicatorsanda recorder point (averageofthefour)are
Rev. 0029
locatedonPanel9-5
Page 7 of 26
.NOTE:Anair bubbleorleakin the referencelegcan cause inaccurate
3.0
readingsinaconservative
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS
direction resulting in a mismatch between level indicators
A.
.This problem is particularly
[NER/C] Verification of a digit in CORE LIMIT and DETECTOR POSITION
prevalent after extended outages when startingupfromcold
windows prior to or during TIP insertion ensures TIPs retain the ability to
shutdown conditionsandatlow reactor pressures.LER85-006-02(SeeLPFolder)(Section X.C.1.j.provides more detail)
determine its proper position. This will prevent malfunctions which could
((e)Fourother
damage the TIP detector.
narrow range instrumentsarelocatedinthecontrolroom,twoabovetheFWLCSlevel
[GE SIL-166]
indicatorsonpanel9-5(3-208A&D), one above HPCI (3-208B)and
B.
one above RCIC (3-208C)onpanel9-3.OPL171.003Revision17Page21of54
To prevent accidental exposure to personnel , immediately evacuate the area if
INSTRUCTOR
the TIP drive area radiation monitor alarms.
NOTES Associated
C.
with RFPT/Main TurbineandHPCIIRCICtrip
[NER/C] Always observe READY light illuminated prior to inserting detector.
[GE
SIL-166]
D.
(NERlC] DO NOT move CHANNEL SELECT switch with detector inserted past
Indexer position (0001). The common channel interlock can be defeated in this
manner resulting in detector and equipment damage.
[GE SIL-092]
E.
(NERlC] Should detector fail to shift to slow speed when it enters the core, the
LOW switch should be turned on, switched to manual mode, and the detector
withdrawn.
[GE SIL-166]
F.
[NER/C] Length of time detector is left in core should be minimized to limit
activation of detector and cable.
[GE SIL-166]
G.
(NERlC] When TIP System operation is not desired, detectors should be retracted
and stored in chamber shield with ball valves closed .
[GE SIL-166] Storage of
detector in Indexer (0001) is allowed only for ALARA concerns and to prevent
unnecessary masking of multiple inputs to annunciator RX BLDG AREA
RADIATION HIGH 2-RA-90-1 D (2-XA-55-3A, Window 22).
. H.
[NER/C] Upon receipt of a PCIS signal (low reactor water level or high drywell
pressure), any detector inserted beyond its shield chamber should be verified to
automatically shift to reverse mode and begin withdrawal. Once in shield, ball
and purge valves close.
[GE SIL-166] Ball valve cannot be reopened until PCIS is
reset on Panel 2-9-4 and manual reset of TIP ISOLATION RESET pushbutton
2-HS-94-7D/S2 located on Panel 2-9-13.
I.
A detector should not be abruptly stopped from fast speed to off without first
switching to slow speed.
J.
[NER/C] Drive Control Units (DCU) should be monitored during withdrawal to
prevent any chamber shield withdrawal limit from being overrun. Detectors
should be stopped manually at shield limit if auto stop limit switch should fail
and verify ball valve closes.
[GE SIL-166]
K.
Only one TIP at a time should be operated when maintenance is being
performed in TIP drive area.
 
(
l
BFN
Traversing Incore Probe System
2-01-94
Unit2
Rev. 0029
Page 8 of 26
3.0
PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)
L.
[NRC/CJ DO NOT operate TIPswith personnel inside TIP Room or in vicinity of
TIP tubing and Indexers in Drywell. Requirement may be waived with approval
of Shift Manager and site RADCON manager or designee. In this instance,
RADCON is required to establish such controls as are necessary to prevent
access to TIP tubing and Indexer areas to preclude unnecessary exposure to
personnel working in Drywell. RADCON Field Operations Shift Supervisor is
required to be notified prior to operation of TIP System.
[NRC InformationNotice88-063,
Supplement2J
M.
No channel should be indexed to common channel 10 unless all other channels
are not indexed to channel 10 and all their READY lights are illuminated.
N.
[NERlC] DO NOT turn MODE switch to OFF on Drive Control Unit if detector is
outside shield chamber unless personnel safety requires it. [GE SIL-166J This
removes power preventing automatic withdrawal on PCIS signal and causing
ball valves to close on cable or detector. Tip Ball Valves CANNOT fully close
and shear valves may have to be actuated.
O.
CHANNEL SELECT switches on Drive Control Units should always be rotated
in clockwise direction when selecting channels.
P.
Connector on shear valve indicator circuit should not be removed while testing
shear valve explosive charges or performing shear valve maintenance with
detector inserted. This will cause an automatic detector withdrawal.
Q .
Continuous voice communication should be maintained between TIP operator
or maintenance personnel in control room and drive mechanism area while
maintenance is being performed and TIP detector driving is necessary.
R.
Each applicable ball valve should be opened prior to operating that TIP
machine.
S.
TIP Drive Mechanisms and Indexers should have continuous purge supply
unless required to be removed from service for maintenance.
T.
During outages when containment is deinerted for personnel access, TIP
Indexer purge supply should be transferred from nitrogen to Control Air for
personnel safety.
U.
Detector damage is possible if TIP ball valve is left open, or is opened during
DRYWELL PRESSURE TEST. (GE SIL-166)
 
(
(
31. RO 216000Kl.l O00l/MEM/T2G2/PR.INSTRJ9/216000Kl.lO//RO/SRO/
Which ONE of the following indicates how raising recirculation flow affects the Emergency System Range
indicators (3-58A -58B) and Narrow Range Indicators (e.g., L1-3-53) on Panel 9-5?
A.
No effect on Emergency System Range; Narrow Range will indicate higher.
B.
Emergency System Range will indicate higher; Narrow Range will not be affected.
C.
Both Emergency System Range and Narrow Range will indicate lower.
D.oI Emergency System Range will indicate lower and Narrow Range will not be affected.
KIA Statement:
216000 Nuclear Boiler Inst
K1.10 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between NUCLEAR
BOILER INSTRUMENTATION and the following : Recirculation flow control system
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of the effect of changes in Recirculation flow on reactor water level instrumentation.
References:
OPL171.003
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the effect of raising Recirc flow on
Normal Range and Emergency Systems Range level instrumentation.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments may read slightly higher at colder
conditions, but this does NOT apply to Recirc flow changes.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments are not effected by Recirc Flow
changes, but Emergency System Range isntruments will read lower.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because Emergency System Range instruments will read lower, but the
Narrow Range instruments will not.
D is correct.
 
(
d.
Four ranges of level indication
OPL 171.003
Revision 17
Page 20 of 54
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
Normal Control Range (Narrow Range)
(1)
(a)
oto +60 inch range covering the
normal operating range (analog) with
+60" up to +70" digital and 0" down to
- 10" digital readings.
Obj. V.B.5
Obj. V.B.6
TP-3 shows only
analog scale
(b)
Referenced to instrument zero
(c)
Four of these instruments are
used by Feedwater Level Control
System (FWLCS). The level
signal utilized by the FWLCS is
not directed through the Analog
Trip System.
i.
Temperature
compensated by a
pressure signal
Obj. V.B.11.
Obj. V.B.13.
(
ii.
Most accurate level
indication available to the
operator
iii.
Calibrated for normal
operating pressure and
temperature
(d)
These indicators and a recorder
point (average of the four) are
located on Panel 9-5.
NOTE: An air bubble or leak in
the reference leg can cause
inaccurate readings in a non-
conservative direction resulting in
a mismatch between level
indicators.
This problem is particularly
prevalent after extended outages
when starting up from cold
shutdown conditions and at low
reactor pressures.
LER 85-006-02
(See LP Folder)
(Section X.C.1.j.
provides more
detail)
 
(
(e)
Four other narrow range
instruments are located in the
control room, two above the
FWLCS level indicators on panel
9-5 (3-208A & D), one above
HPCI (3-208B)and one above
RCIC (3-208C)on panel 9-3.
OPL171 .003
Revision 17
Page 21 of 54
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
Associated with
RFPT/Main Turbine
and HPCIIRCIC trip
instruments
instruments
(2)Emergency SystemsRange(WideRange)2Analog
(2)
metersand2Digitalmeters
Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) 2 Analog meters
.(a)-155to+60 inches rangecoveringnormal
and 2 Digital meters .
operating rangeanddowntothe
(a)
lower instrumentnozzlereturn (b)Referenced
-155 to +60 inches range
to instrument
covering normal operating range
zero (c)FourMCR indicatorsonPanel9-5 monitorthisrangeoflevel
and down to the lower instrument
indication.(d)Calibratedfornormal operating pressure and temperature(e)ThelevelsignalutilizedbytheWideRange instruments
nozzle return
havesafetyrelated
(b)
functionsandare directedthroughthe
Referenced to instrument zero
Analog Trip System.(f)Level indicationforthisrangeis
(c)
Obj.V.B.12.alsoprovidedonthe
Four MCR indicators on Panel 9-
BackupControlPanel
5 monitor this range of level
(25-32).(3)Shutdown Vessel Flood Range (Flood-up Range)(a)oto+400 inches range covering upperportionof reactor vessel (b)Referenced
indication.
to instrument
(d)
zero Calibratedforcold conditions
Calibrated for normal operating
<<212&deg;F,0psig)(c)Provides level indication
pressure and temperature
duringvesselfloodingorcooldown.  
(e)
(Transient flashing effectscancauseindicatedlevelto
The level signal utilized by the
oscillateorbe erratic.Asthe referencelegrefills,theindicatedlevel
Wide Range instruments have
approaches
safety related functions and are
a more accurate waterlevelindication
directed through the Analog Trip
.TheRVLlSmod
System.
decreasesthetime necessaryforthisrefillto
(f)
occur j.NormalControlRange (NarrowRange)and EmergencySystemsRange(WideRange)Level
Level indication for this range is
Discrepancies(1)NarrowRangelevel
Obj. V.B.12.
instrumentation
also provided on the Backup
iscalibratedtobemost
Control Panel (25-32).
accurateatrated temperature
(3)
and pressure (particularly
Shutdown Vessel Flood Range (Flood-up
the instrumentsforFWLCS ,sincethey are temperature
Range)
compensated)
(a)
.Atcold conditions
oto +400 inches range covering
the non-FWLCS instrumentsreadhigh(not
upper portion of reactor vessel
temperature
(b)
compensated)
Referenced to instrument zero
.(2)WideRange
Calibrated for cold conditions
instrumentsarealsocalibratedforrated
<<212&deg;F, 0 psig)
temperature
(c)
and pressure OPL171.003Revision17Page32of54
Provides level indication during
INSTRUCTOR
vessel flooding or cool down.
NOTES(a)TheindicatedlevelontheWideRange(9-5)isalsoaffectedby
 
changesinthe subcooling
(
of recirculation
Transient flashing effects can cause
waterandtheamountofflowatthelower(variableleg)tap
indicated level to oscillate or be
.Obj.V.B.15(b)Atrated
erratic. As the reference leg refills,
conditions
the indicated level approaches a
with minimum recirculationflowtheWideRange instruments
more accurate water level indication .
areaccurate.As
The RVLlS mod decreases the time
recirculationflowis increasedpastthe lowertapithasa significantvelocityheadandsomefrictionlosswhichreducesthe
necessary for this refill to occur
pressureonthevariablelegtothe
j.
differential
Normal Control Range (Narrow Range) and
pressureinstrument,resultinginanindicatedlevellowerthanactual.Thiscouldbeasmuch
Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) Level
as10-15inches
Discrepancies
errorwhenatratedflowandpower.(c)Duetocalibrationforrated
(1)
conditionsandnodensity
Narrow Range level instrumentation is
compensationatcold conditions
calibrated to be most accurate at rated
these instrumentsreadhigh.  
temperature and pressure (particularly
(32.RO219000K2
the instruments for FWLCS, since they
.02 00l/C/A/T2G2/0I-74//219000K2.02//RO/SRO/NEW
are temperature compensated). At cold
10/16/07Giventhefollowingplant
conditions the non-FWLCS instruments
conditions
read high (not temperature
:*Unit-2isat100%ratedpowerw
compensated).
ithRHRLoopII i n SuppressionPoolCoolingmodetosupportaHPC IFullFlowtest
(2)
surveillance.
Wide Range instruments are also
*Unit-1 experiencesaLOCAwhichresultsinaCASsignalinitiationonUnit-1
calibrated for rated temperature and
.WhichONEofthefollowing
pressure
describes the currentstatusofUnit-2RHR
OPL171.003
system and whatactionsmustbetakentorestore
Revision 17
SuppressionPoolCoolingonUn
Page 32 of 54
it-2?A.2Aand2CRHRPumpsaretripped
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
.28and2Dpumpsareunaffected
(a)
.Noadditionalactionis
The indicated level on the Wide
required.B.28and2DRHRPumpsaretripped.2Aand2Cpumpsareunaffected.PlaceRHRLoopIin
Range (9-5) is also affected by
SuppressionPoolCooling
changes in the subcooling of
recirculation water and the
amount of flow at the lower
(variable leg) tap.
Obj. V.B.15
(b)
At rated conditions with
minimum recirculation flow the
Wide Range instruments are
accurate. As recirculation flow is
increased past the lower tap it
has a significant velocity head
and some friction loss which
reduces the pressure on the
variable leg to the differential
pressure instrument, resulting in
an indicated level lower than
actual. This could be as much
as 10-15 inches error when at
rated flow and power.
(c)
Due to calibration for rated
conditions and no density
compensation at cold conditions
these instruments read high.
 
(
32. RO 219000K2.02 00l/C/A/T2G2/0I-74//219000K2.02//RO/SRO/NEW 10/16/07
Given the following plant conditions:
*
Unit-2 is at 100% rated power with RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling mode to support
a HPCI Full Flow test surveillance.
*
Unit-1 experiences a LOCA which results in a CAS signal initiation on Unit-1.
Which ONE of the following describes the current status of Unit-2 RHR system and what actions must be
taken to restore Suppression Pool Cooling on Unit-2?
A.
2A and 2C RHR Pumps are tripped. 28 and 2D pumps are unaffected . No additional action is
required.
B. 28 and 2D RHR Pumps are tripped. 2A and 2C pumps are unaffected. Place RHR Loop I in
Suppression Pool Cooling immediately.
c. All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling
immediately.
immediately.
c.AllfourRHR
D~ All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling after a 60
pumpsreceiveatripsignal.PlaceRHRLoopIIin
second time delay.
Suppression
KIA Statement:
Poo l Cooling immediately
219000 RHR/LPCI: Torus/Pool Cooling Mode
.AllfourRHR
K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Pumps
pumps receiveatripsignal.PlaceRHRLoopIIin
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
SuppressionPoolCoolingaftera60secondtimedelay
plant conditions and times to determine which RHR pumps can be used for Suppression Pool Cooling.
.KIA Statement:219000RHR/LPCI:
References: 2-01-74, OPL 171.044
Torus/PoolCoolingMode
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
K2.02-Knowledgeof
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
electrical
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
powersuppliestothefollowing
0610 NRC Exam
: Pumps KIA Justification:
 
This question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
candidatetousespecificplantconditionsandtimesto
Plausibility Analysis:
determinewhichRHRpumpscanbeusedfor
(
SuppressionPoolCooling.
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Response of Unit-2 RHR pumps due to a Unit 1 CAS initition.
2. Recognize the difference between a Single Unit CAS and Simultaneous Unit CAS.
3. Recognize that Preferred and Non-preferred ECCS pumps do NOT apply with the given conditions.
A is incorrect. This is plausible based on RHR Loop II being the Preferred pumps for Unit-2.
B is incorrect. This is plausible if taken from the perspective of Unit 1 operation, not Unit 2 operation.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because all four RHR pumps on Unit 2 will trip, but they are locked out
from manual start for 60 seconds based on D/G and/or Shutdown Board loading concerns.
D is correct.
(
 
(
BFN
Residual Heat Removal System
2-01-74
Unit2
Rev. 0133
Page 331 of 367
Appendix A
(Page 2 of 7)
Unit 1 & 2 Core Spray/RHR Logic Discussion
2.2
ECCS Preferred Pump Logic
Concurrent Accident Signals On Unit 1 and Unit 2
With normal power available, the starting and running of RHR pumps on a 4KV
Shutdown Board already loaded by the opposite unit's Core Spray, RHR pumps, and
RHRSW pumps could overload the affected 4KV Shutdown Boards and trip the
normal feeder breaker. This would result in a temporary loss of power to the
affected 4KV Shutdown Boards while the boards are being transferred to their
diesels. To prevent this undesirable transient, Unit 2 RHR Pumps 2A and 2C are
load shed on a Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed
on a Unit 2 accident signal. Unit 2 Core Spray Pumps 2A and 2C are load shed on a
Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Core Spray Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed on
a Unit 2 accident signal. This makes the Preferred ECCS pumps Unit 1 Division I
Core Spray and RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 2 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.
Conversely, the Non-preferred ECCS pumps are Unit 1 Division 2 Core Spray and
RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 1 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.
The preferred and non-preferred ECCS pumps are as follows:
UNIT 1 & 2
PREFERRED ECCS Pumps
CS1A,CS1C,RHR1A,RHR1C
CS 2B, CS 20, RHR 2B, RHR 20
NON-PREFERRED ECCS Pumps
CS 1B, CS 10, RHR 1B, RHR 10
CS2~CS2C,RHR2A,RHR2C
UNIT3
Unit 3 does not have ECCS Preferred/Non-Preferred Pump Logic.
Accident Signal On One Unit
With an accident on one unit, ECCS Preferred pump logic trips all running RHR and
Core Spray pumps on the non-accident unit.
 
(
OPL171.044
Revision 15
Page 50 of 159
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
Note:
Presently Unit 1 Accident signal will not affect Unit 2 due to DCN H2735A that lifted wires
from relays. Unit 2 will still affect Unit 1.
However, the following represents modifications
to the inter-tie logic as it will be upon Unit 1 recovery.
(
f.
(1)
Unit 1 Preferred RHR pumps are 1A and 1C
(2)
Unit 2 Preferred RHR pumps are 28 and 2D
(3)
Unit 2 initiation logic is as follows:Div 1 RHR
logic initiates Div 1 pumps ( A and C), and Div
2 logic initiates Div 2 pumps (B and D)
Accident Signal
(1)
LOCA signals are divided into two separate
signals, one referred to as a Pre Accident
Signal (PAS) and the other referred to as a
Common Accident Signal (CAS).
* PAS
-122" Rx water level (Level 1)
OR
2.45 psig DW pressure
* CAS
-122" Rx water level (Level 1)
OR
2.45 psig DW pressure AND <450
psig Rx pressure
(2)
If a unit receives an accident signal, then all
its respective RHR and Core Spray pumps
will sequence on based upon power source to
the SD Boards.
(3)
All RHR and Core Spray pumps on the non-
affected unit will trip (if running) and will be
blocked from manual starting for 60 seconds.
Obj. V.B.13.
Obj. V.C.3
Obj. V.C.7
Obj. V.D.6
Obj. V.E.II
Obj. V.B.13.
Obj. V.C.3
Obj. V.C.7
Obj. V.D.6
Obj. V.E.II
Note:
It should be clear
that the only
difference
between the two
signals is the
inclusion of Rx
pressure in the
CAS signal. The
PAS signal is an
anticipatory signal
that allows the
DG's to start on
rising OW
pressure and be
ready should a
CAS be received.
 
OPL171.044
Revision 15
Page 51 of 159
(
INSTRUCTOR NOTES
(4)
After 60 seconds all RHR pumps on the non-
Operator diligence
affected unit may be manually started.
required to
(5)
The non-preferred pumps on the non-
prevent
overloading SO
affected unit are also prevented from
boards/DG's
automatically starting until the affected unit's
accident signal is clear.
(6)
The preferred pumps on the non-affected
unit are locked out from automatically starting
until the affected unit accident signal is clear
OR the non-affected unit receives an
accident signal.
g.
4KV Shutdown Board Load Shed
Obj. V.C .B.
(1)
A stripping of motor loads on the 4KV boards
occurs when the board experiences an
undervoltage condition. This is referred to as a
4KV Load Shed. This shed prepares the board
for the DG ensuring the DG will tie on to the
bus unloaded and without faults.
(2)
The Load Shed occurs when an undervoltage
is experienced on the board i.e. or if the Diesel
were tied to the board (only source) and one of
the units experienced an accident signal which
trips the Diesel output breaker.
(3)
Then, when the Diesel output breaker
interlocks are satisfied, the DG output breaker
would close and, if an initiation signal is
present (CAS) the RHR, CS, and RHRSW
pumps would sequence on
(4)
Following an initiation of a Common Accident
Signal (which trips the diesel breaker), if a
subsequent accident signal is received from
another unit, a second diesel breaker trip on a
"unit priority" basis is provided to ensure that
the Shutdown boards are stripped prior to
starting the RHR pumps and other ECCS
loads
(5)
When an accident signal trip of the diesel
Occurs due to
breakers is initiated from one unit (CASA or
actuation of the
(
CASB), subsequent CAS trips of all eight
diesel breaker
diesel breakers are blocked.
TSCRN relay
 
(
33. RO 226001A4.I2 OOlIMEM/T2G2/PC/P//226001A4.12/3.8/3.9/RO/SRO/
Given the following plant conditions:
*
A pipe break inside containment results in the below parameters:
- Drywell pressure is 20 psig
- Drywell temperature is 210&deg;F
- Suppression chamber pressure is 18 psig.
- Suppression chamber temperature is 155&deg;F.
- Suppression pool level is +2 inches
- Reactor water level is +30 inches
Which ONE list of parameters below must ALWAYS be addressed to determine when it is appropriate to
spray the drywell?
A.
-Suppression Chamber temperature
-Drywell pressure
-Drywell temperature
B.
-Suppression Chamber pressure
-Drywell temperature
-Suppression Pool level
C." -Drywell pressure
-Drywell temperature
-Reactor water level
D.
-Reactor water level
-Suppression Chamber temperature
-Drywell pressure
KIA Statement:
226001 RHR/LPCI: CTMT Spray Mode
A4.12 - Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: ContainmenUdrywell pressure
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
knowledge of which containment parameters are used to determine when Containmerit Sprays can be
used.
References: 1/2/3-EOI-2 Flowchart
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall
or recognize discrete bits of information.
0610 NRC Exam
 
(
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Orywell temperature and pressure are always required to ensure Curve 5 limits are not exceeded.
2. RPV level is always required to verify adequate core cooling is assured prior to diverting RHR flow
for Orywell sprays.
3. Suppression Pool level is always required to verify Suppression Chamber to Orywell vacuum breakers
are uncovered.
4. Suppression Chamber pressure is ONLY required when initiating Orywell Sprays from flowpath PC/Po
5. Suppression Chamber temperature is NOT required to initiate Orywell Sprays.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and press are required , but SC temp is not.
B is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and SP level are required , but SC press is ONLY
required when initiating OW Sprays using PC/Po
C is correct.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because RPV level and OW press are required, but SC temp is not.
 
WHEN
SUPPR CHMBR PRESS EXCEEDS 12 PSIG,
THEN
CONnNUE INTHISPROCEDURE
L
-_..._....----_.....__.__.._---------_...., ..
"
~'.
PClP-7
L
SHUT DOWNRECIRC PUfA'PS ANDOWBLOWERS
# 2
PUMP NPSH AND VORTEX m"TS
INITlAm r:JN SPRAYS USING W:lL:!PUMPSWIREQUJRED
ro ASSUREAIEQUATE OORE COOLING BY CON11NUOUS
INJ(APPX 178)
L
L
L
 
::
L
!:!
~
"
,p'
0"
..,J~"~
L
SHUT DOWN RSCIRC i'IIllW''S RJO r:1"BLO'/IB'tS
L
L
L
 
(
34. RO 234000G2.4.50 OO l/C/NTIG2///234000G2.4.50/IRO/SRO/
Given the following plant conditions:
*
Fuel movement is in progress for channel changeout activities in the Fuel Prep Machine.
*
Gas bubbles are visible coming from the de-channeled bundle.
*
An Area Radiation Monitor adjacent to the SFSP begins alarming.
Which ONE of the following describes the action (s) to take?
Immediately STOP fuel handling, then
_
A.
notify RADCON to monitor & evaluate radiation levels.
B."
evacuate non-essential personnel from the RFF.
C.
evacuate ALL personnel from the RFF.
D.
obtain Reactor Engineering Supervisor's recommendation for movement and sipping of the
damaged fuel assembly.
KIA Statement:
234000 Fuel Handling Equipment
2.4.50 - Emergency Procedures / Plan Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls
identified in the alarm response manual
KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the corrective actions involving Fuel Handling equipment under emergency
conditions.
References:
1/2/3-AOI-79-1 & 79-2, 1/2/3-ARP-9-3A (W1)
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam
 
(
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None
Plausibility Analvsis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :
1. Whether indications are consistent with fuel damage or inadvertant criticality.
2. Based on the answer to Item 1 above, enter the appropriate AOI.
3. Immediate Operator Actions for the selected procedure, AOI-70-1.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because RADCON notification is a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,
however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.
B is correct.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because evacuation of ALL personnel is an IMMEDIATE action in
AOI-70-2 , however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action in the appropriate AOI.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because RE recommendations are a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,
however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.
 
BFN
Panel 9-3
2-ARP-9-3A
(
Unit2
2-XA-55-3A
Rev. 0036
Page 4 of 50
FUEL POOL
SensorlTrip Point:
FLOOR AREA
RADIATION HIGH
RI-90-1B
RI-90-2B
For setpoints
2-RA-90-1A
RI-90-3B
REFER TO 2-SIMI-90B.
11
(Page 1 of 1)
Sensor
RE-90-1B
EI664'
R-11 P-L1NE
Location:
RE-90-2B
E1664'
R-10 U-L1NE
RE-90-3B
E1639'
R-10 Q-L1NE
Probable
Cause:
Automatic
Action:
Operator
Action:
References:
References:
2-01-74,OPL171.044 Level of Knowledge Justification:
A. Change in general radiation levels.
This questionisratedasCIAduetothe
B. Refueling accident.
requirementtoassemble
C. Sensor malfunction.
,sort,andintegratethepartsofthequestiontopredictanoutcome
None
.This requires mentallyusingthisknowledgeandits
A.
meaning to predict the correct outcome.0610NRCExam
CHECK 2-RI-90-1A, 2-RI-90-2A and 2-RI-90-3A on Panel 2-9-11.
REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
B. NOTIFY refuel floor personnel.
Analysis: (Inordertoanswerthisquestioncorrectlythecandidatemust
C. IF Dry Cask loading/unloading activities are in progress, THEN
determinethefollowing:
NOTIFY Cask Supervisor.
1.ResponseofUnit-2RHRpumpsduetoaUnit1CASinitition
D. IF airborne levels rise by 100 DAC AND RADCON confirms, THEN
.2.Recognizethe
REFER TO EPIP-1.
differencebetweenaSingleUnitCASand
E. REFER TO 2-AOI-79-1 or 2-AOI-79-2 as applicable.
SimultaneousUnitCAS.3.RecognizethatPreferredandNon-preferredECCSpumpsdoNOTapplywiththegivenconditions.Ais incorrect.ThisisplausiblebasedonRHRLoopIIbeingthePreferredpumpsforUnit-2
F. IF this alarm is not valid, THEN REFER TO 0-01-55.
.Bis incorrect.Thisisplausibleiftakenfromthe
G. IF this alarm is valid, THEN
perspectiveofUnit1operation,notUnit2operation
MONITOR the other parameters that input to it frequently. These
.Cis incorrect.ThisisplausiblebecauseallfourRHRpumpsonUnit2willtrip,buttheyarelockedoutfrommanualstartfor60
other parameters will be masked from alarming while this alarm is
secondsbasedonD/Gand/orShutdownBoardloadingconcerns.Dis correct.(
sealed in.
(BFN Residual Heat Removal System 2-01-74 Unit2Rev.0133Page331 of 367 Appendix A(Page2 of 7)Unit 1&2Core Spray/RHR Logic Discussion2.2ECCS Preferred Pump Logic Concurrent
H. ENTER 2-EOI-3 Flowchart.
AccidentSignalsOnUnit1andUnit2Withnormal
0-47E600-13
poweravailable,thestartingandrunningofRHRpumpsona4KV
2-47E610-90-1
ShutdownBoardalreadyloadedbytheoppositeunit'sCoreSpray,RHRpumps,and
RHRSWpumpscouldoverloadtheaffected4KV
ShutdownBoardsandtripthe
normal feederbreaker.Thiswouldresultina
temporarylossofpowertothe
affected 4KVShutdownBoardswhiletheboardsarebeingtransferredtotheir
diesels.To prevent this undesirabletransient,Unit2RHRPumps2Aand2CareloadshedonaUnit1
accidentsignalandUnit1Pumps1
Band 10willbeloadshedonaUnit2 accidentsignal.Unit2CoreSprayPumps2Aand2CareloadshedonaUnit1 accidentsignalandUnit1CoreSprayPumps1
Band 10willbeloadshedonaUnit2 accidentsignal.ThismakesthePreferredECCSpumpsUnit1DivisionICoreSprayandRHRPumpsandUnit2Division2CoreSprayandRHRPumps.
Conversely
, the Non-preferredECCSpumpsareUnit1Division2CoreSprayandRHRPumpsandUnit2Division1CoreSprayandRHRPumps.Thepreferredand
non-preferredECCSpumpsareasfollows:UNIT1&2 PREFERREDECCSPumps CS1A,CS1C,RHR1A,RHR1CCS2B,CS 20,RHR2B,RHR 20 NON-PREFERREDECCSPumpsCS1B,CS 10,RHR1B,RHR 10
UNIT3Unit3doesnothaveECCS
Preferred/Non-PreferredPumpLog ic.AccidentSignalOnOneUnitWithan accidentononeunit,ECCSPreferredpumplogictripsallrunningRHRandCoreSpraypumpsonthe
non-accident
unit.
(OPL171.044Revision15Page50 of 159 INSTRUCTOR
NOTES Note: PresentlyUnit1 AccidentsignalwillnotaffectUnit2duetoDCN
H2735Athatliftedwiresfromrelays.Unit2willstillaffectUnit1.However,thefollowingrepresentsmodificationstotheinter-tielogicasitwillbeuponUnit1recovery.
(f.(1)Unit1PreferredRHRpumpsare
1A and 1C(2)Unit2PreferredRHRpumpsare
28 and 2D(3)Unit2initiationlogicisas
follows:Div1RHRlogicinitiatesDiv1pumps(AandC),andDiv2logicinitiatesDiv2pumps(BandD)
Accident Signal(1)LOCAsignalsaredividedintotwo
separatesignals,onereferredtoasaPre
AccidentSignal(PAS)andtheotherreferredtoasa
Common AccidentSignal(CAS)
.*PAS-122"Rx waterlevel(Level1)
OR2.45psigDW
pressure*CAS-122"Rxwaterlevel(Level1)
OR2.45psigDW
pressure AND<450psigRxpressure(2)Ifaunitreceivesan
accidentsignal,thenall
its respectiveRHRandCoreSpraypumps
will sequenceonbasedupon
powersourcetotheSDBoards.(3)AllRHRandCoreSpraypumpsontheaffectedunitwilltrip(ifrunning)andwillbeblockedfrom
manualstartingfor60seconds.Obj.V.B.13.Obj.V.C.3Obj.V.C.7 Obj.V.D.6Obj.V.E.II
Obj.V.B.13.Obj.V.C.3 Obj.V.C.7 Obj.V.D.6 Obj.V.E.II Note:Itshouldbeclearthattheonly
differencebetweenthetwosignalsistheinclusionofRxpressureintheCASsignal.ThePASsignalisananticipatorysignalthatallowstheDG'stostartonrisingOWpressureandbereadyshouldaCASbereceived.
OPL171.044Revision15Page51of159
(INSTRUCTOR
NOTES (4)After 60 secondsallRHR pumps on the non-Operator diligence affected unit may be manually started.required to (5)The non-preferred
pumps on the non-prevent overloading
SO affected unit are also prevented from boards/DG's
automatically
starting until the affected unit's accident signalisclear.(6)Thepreferredpumps
on the non-affected
unit are locked out from automatically
starting until the affected unit accident signal is clear OR the non-affected
unit receives an accident signal.g.4KV Shutdown Board Load ShedObj.V.C.B.(1)A stripping of motor loads on the 4KV boards occurs when the board experiences
an undervoltage
condition.
This is referredtoasa 4KV Load Shed.This shed prepares the board for the DG ensuringtheDGwilltieonto
the bus unloaded and without faults.(2)The Load Shed occurs when an undervoltage
is experienced
on the boardi.e.orif the Diesel weretiedtothe board (only source)and one of the units experienced
an accident signal which trips the Diesel output breaker.(3)Then, when the Diesel output breaker interlocks
are satisfied, the DG output breaker would closeand,ifan initiation
signal is present (CAS)theRHR,CS,and
RHRSW pumps would sequence on (4)Following an initiation
of a Common Accident Signal (which trips the diesel breaker),ifa subsequent
accident signal is received from anotherunit,a second diesel breakertripona"unit priority" basis is provided to ensure that the Shutdown boards are stripped prior to startingtheRHR pumps and other ECCS loads (5)When an accident signal trip of the diesel Occurs due to breakers is initiated from one unit (CASA or actuation of the (CASB), subsequent
CAS trips of all eight diesel breaker diesel breakers are blocked.TSCRN relay
(33.RO 226001A4.I2
OOlIMEM/T2G2/PC/P//226001A4.12/3.8/3.9/RO/SRO/Giventhefollowingplantconditions:*Apipebreakinside
containmentresultsinthebelow
parameters:-Drywell pressureis20psig-Drywell temperatureis210&deg;F-Suppression
chamber pressureis18psig.-Suppression
chamber temperatureis155&deg;F.-Suppressionpoollevelis+2inches-Reactor waterlevelis+30inchesWhichONElistof
parametersbelowmust ALWAYS be addressed to determinewhenitisappropriatetospraythedrywell?
A.-Suppression
Chamber temperature-Drywellpressure-Drywell temperature
B.-Suppression
Chamber pressure-Drywell temperature-SuppressionPoollevel C."-Drywellpressure-Drywell temperature-Reactor water level D.-Reactor water level-Suppression
Chamber temperature-Drywellpressure
KIA Statement:226001RHR/LPCI:
CTMTSprayModeA4.12-Abilityto
manually operate and/or monitorinthecontrolroom:
ContainmenUdrywell
pressure KIA Justification:
This question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
candidatetousespecificknowledgeofwhich
containment
parametersareusedto determinewhenContain
meritSprayscanbe
used.References:
1/2/3-EOI-2
Flowchart Level of Knowledge Justification:ThisquestionisratedasMEMduetothe
requirementtorecallorrecognizediscretebitsof
information.0610NRCExam
(REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
Analysis:Inorderto answerthisquestion
correctlythecandidatemust
determinethefollowing:
1.Orywell temperature
and pressurearealwaysrequiredtoensureCurve5limitsarenotexceeded.
2.RPVlevelisalwaysrequiredtoverifyadequatecorecoolingis
assuredpriortodivertingRHRflow
for Orywell sprays.3.SuppressionPoollevelisalwaysrequiredtoverify
Suppression
ChambertoOrywellvacuumbreakersareuncovered.
4.Suppression
Chamber pressure is ONLYrequiredwheninitiatingOrywellSpraysfromflowpathPC/P
o 5.Suppression
Chamber temperature
isNOTrequiredto
initiateOrywellSprays.Ais incorrect.Thisisplaus
iblebecauseOWtempandpressarerequired
,butSCtempisnot.Bis incorrect.Thisis plausible becauseOWtempandSPlevelarerequired
,butSCpressisONLYrequiredwheninitiatingOWSpraysusingPC/P
oCis correct.Dis incorrect.Thisis plausible becauseRPVlevelandOW
pressarerequired,butSCtempisnot.
WHEN SUPPR CH MBR PRESS EX CEEDS 12 PSIG, THEN CONnNUEINTHISPR OCEDURE L-_..._....----_.....__.__.._---------_....,.."PClP-7 L SHUT DOWN RECI RC PUfA'PS AND OW BL OWERS#2 PUMP NPS H AND VO RTEX m"TS INITlAm r:JN SPRAYS USING W:lL:!PUMP SWIREQUJRED
ro ASSUR EAIEQUATEOORECOOLIN
GBYCON11NUOUS
INJ (APPX 17 8)L L L
:: L!:!" ,p'0"..
L S HUT DOWN RS CIRC i'IIllW''S RJO r:1" BLO'/IB'tS L L L
(34.RO 234000G2.4.50
OO l/C/NTIG2///234000G2.4.50/IRO/SRO/Giventhefollowingplant
conditions
:*Fuelmo vementisinp rogressforchannelchangeou
t activitiesintheFuelPrepMach
ine.*Gas bubblesarevisiblecomingfromthede-channeled
bundle.*AnAreaRadiation
Monitor adjacenttotheSFSPbeginsalarm
ing.Wh ichONEofthe following describestheaction(s)totake?
Immed iatelySTOPfuelhandling,then_
A.notifyRADCONto
monitor&evaluateradiation
levels.B." evacuate non-essential
personnelfromtheRFF
.C.evacuate ALL personnelfromtheRFF
.D.obtain Reactor Engineering
Supervisor's
recommendation
for movementandsipp ingofthedamagedfuel
assembly.KIAStatement:234000FuelHandling
Equipment 2.4.50-Emergency Procedures/PlanAbilitytoverify
system alarm setpointsandoperatecontrolsidentifiedinthealarm
response manual KIA Justification:
This question sat isfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
candidatetousespecific
plant conditions
to determine the corrective
act ionsinvolvingFuelHandl
ing equipmentunderemergency
cond itions.References:
1/2/3-AOI-79-1&79-2 , 1/2/3-ARP-9-3A (W1)Levelof Knowledge Justification:Thisquestionisratedas
CIAduetothe requirementtoassemble
,sort,and integratethepartsofthequestiontopredictanoutcome.Th
isrequiresmentallyusingthisknowledgeanditsmean
ingtopred ict the correct outcome.0610NRCExam
(REFERENCE PROVIDED: None Plausibility
Analvsis:Inordertoanswerthisquestion
correctly the candidate must determinethefollowing
: 1.Whether indications
are consistentwithfueldamageor
inadvertant
criticality.
2.Basedonthe
answertoItem1above,enterthe
appropriate
AOI.3.Immediate Operator Actionsfortheselectedprocedure,AOI-70-1.Ais incorrect.Thisis plausible becauseRADCONnotificationisa
subsequentactioninAOI-70-1, however non-essential
personnel evacuationisan IMMEDIATE action.Bis correct.C is incorrect.Thisis plausible because evacuat ionofALLpersonnelisan
IMMEDIATEactionin AOI-70-2 , however non-essential
personnel evacuation
isan IMMEDIATE action inthe appropr iate AOI.D is incorrect.
Thisi s plausible because RE recommendationsarea subsequentactioninAOI-70-1
, howe ver non-essential
personnel evacuationisan IMMEDIATE act ion.
BFN Panel 9-3 2-ARP-9-3A
(Unit2 2-XA-55-3A Rev.0036 Page 4 of 50FUELPOOL SensorlTrip
Point: FLOOR AREARADIATIONHIGHRI-90-1B RI-90-2BForsetpo ints 2-RA-90-1A
RI-90-3BREFERTO 2-SIMI-90B
.11(Page1of1)
Sensor RE-90-1 B EI664'R-11 P-L1NE Location: RE-90-2B E1664'R-10U-L1NE
RE-90-3BE1639'R-10Q-L1NE
Probable Cause: Automatic Action: Operator Action: References:
A.Change in general rad iation levels.B.Refueling accident.C.Sensor malfunct ion.None A.CHECK 2-RI-90-1A , 2-RI-90-2A and 2-RI-90-3AonPanel2-9-11.
B.NOTIFYrefuelfloorpersonnel.C.IFDryCaskload
ing/unloading
activitiesareinprogress,THEN
NOTIFY Cask Supervisor.D.IF airbornelevelsriseby100DACAND
RADCONconfirms,THENREFERTOEPIP-1.E.REFERTO2-AOI-79-1or
2-AOI-79-2
as applicable.
F.IFthisalarm
isnotvalid,THENREFERTO0-01
-55.G.IFthisalarmisvalid
, THEN MONITOR the other parametersthatinputtoit
frequently.
These other parameterswillbemaskedfrom
alarmingwhilethisalarmissealedin.H.ENTER 2-EOI-3 Flowchart.0-47E600-132-47E610-90-1
2-45E620-3
2-45E620-3
GE 730E356 Series,TVACalc NDQ00902005001/EDC63693
GE 730E356 Series, TVA Calc NDQ00902005001/EDC63693
o o o o o o o o  
o
(BFNFuelDamage
o
During Refueling 2-AOI-79-1
o
Unit 2Rev.0017Page3 of71.0PURPOSEThisinstructionprovidesthesymptoms,automaticactionsand
o
operatoractionsforafueldamageaccident.2.0SYMPTOMS
o
A.Possible annunciatorsinalarm: 1.FUELPOOLFLOORAREARADIATIONHIGH(2-XA-55-3A,window1)
o
.2.AIR PARTICULATEMONITORRADIATIONHIGH(2-XA-55-3A,window2).3.RXBLDG,TURBBLDG,RFZONEEXHRADIATIONHIGH(2-XA
o
-55-3A,window4).4.REACTORZONEEXHAUSTRADIATIONHIGH
o
(2-XA-55-3A
 
,window21).5.RXBLDGAREARADIATIONHIGH(2-XA-55-3A,window22).6.REFUELINGZONEEXHAUSTRADIATIONHIGH(2-XA-55-3A,window34).
(
B.Gasbubblesvisible,intheSpentFuelStoragePooland/orReactorCavity,attributedtophysicalfueldamage.C.Knowndroppedorphysicallydamagedfuelbundle.D.PortableCAMinalarm.
BFN
E.RadiationlevelontheRefuelFloorisgreaterthan25mr/hrandcauseis
Fuel Damage During Refueling
unknown.
BFNFuelDamageDuringRefueling
2-AOI-79-1
2-AOI-79-1
Unit2Rev.0017Page5of74.0OPERATORACTIONS4.1ImmediateActions
Unit 2
[1]STOPallfuelhandling.
Rev. 0017
[2]EVACUATEallnon-essentialpersonnelfromRefuelFloor.
Page 3 of7
4.2 Subsequent
1.0
Actions CAUTION o oThereleaseofiodineisofmajorconcern.Ifgasbubblesareidentifiedatanytime,IodinereleaseshouldbeassumeduntilRADCONdeterminesotherwise.
PURPOSE
[1]VERIFY secondarycontainmentisintact.(REFERTOTechSpec3.6.4.1)
This instruction provides the symptoms, automatic actions and operator actions for a
[2]IFanyEOIentryconditionismet, THEN ENTER the appropriate
fuel damage accident.
EOI(s).[3]VERIFY automatic actions.[4]NOTIFYRADCONtoperformthefollowing:
2.0
n o o*EVALUATEtheradiationlevels.
SYMPTOMS
0*MAKE recommendationforpersonnelaccess.
A.
0*MONITORaroundtheReactorBuilding
Possible annunciators in alarm:
Equipment Hatch,atlevelsbelowtheRefuelFloor,forpossiblespreadofthe
1.
release.0[5]REFERTOEPIP-1forpropernotification.
FUEL POOL FLOOR AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 1).
o  
2.
((BFN Fuel Damage During Refueling 2-AOI-79-1
AIR PARTICULATE MONITOR RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
Unit 2Rev.0017 Page 6 of 7 4.2 Subsequent
window 2).
Actions (continued)
3.
[6]MONITOR radiationlevels,fortheaffectedareas,usingthe
RX BLDG, TURB BLDG, RF ZONE EXH RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
following radiation recorders and indicators:A.2-RR-90-1 (points1and2), 2-MON-90-50 (Address 11), 2-RR-90-142
window 4).
and 2-RR-90-140(Panel2-9-2)
4.
.0 B.2-RM-90-142, 2-RM-90-140, 2-RM-90-143
REACTOR ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 21).
and 2-RM-90-141
5.
DetectorsAandB(Panel2-9-10).
RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 22).
0 C.2-RI-90-1A
6.
and 2-RI-90-2A(Panel2-9-11).
REFUELING ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,
0 D.0-CONS-90-362A (Address09,10,08)forUnit1,2, 3-RM-90-250, respectively(Panel1-9-44).
window 34).
0[7]IF possible, MONITOR portable CAMs&ARMs.[8]REQUEST Chemistrytoperform 0-SI-4.8.8.2-1 to determine if iodine concentrationhasrisen.0[9]NOTIFY Reactor Engineering
B.
Supervisor,orhis designee , and OBTAIN recommendation
Gas bubbles visible, in the Spent Fuel Storage Pool and/or Reactor Cavity,
for movement and sippingofthe damaged fuel assembly.0[10]OBTAIN Plant Managers approvalpriorto resuminganyfuel transfer operations.
attributed to physical fuel damage.
0[11]WHEN conditionhasclearedANDifrequired, THEN RETURN ventilation
C.
systems, includingSGTS,tonormal.
Known dropped or physically damaged fuel bundle.
REFERTO2-01-30A,2-01-30B,0-01-30F,0-01-31,and0-01-65.
D.
0  
Portable CAM in alarm.
(BFN Inadvertent
E.
CriticalityDuringIncore
Radiation level on the Refuel Floor is greater than 25 mr/hr and cause is
2-AOI-79-2Unit2 Fuel MovementsRev.0013Page5of8 4.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS 4.1 Immediate Actions[1]IF unexpectedcriticalityisobservedfollowingcontrolrod
unknown.
withdrawal, THEN REINSERTthecontrolrod.
 
0[2]IFallcontrolrods
BFN
CANNOTbefullyinserted, THEN MANUALL Y SCRAMthereactor.
Fuel Damage During Refueling
0[3]IF unexpectedcriticalityisobservedfollowingthe
2-AOI-79-1
insertionofa fuel assembly , THEN PERFORMthefollowing:
Unit2
0[3.1]VERIFYfuelgrapplelatchedontothefuel
Rev. 0017
assemblyhandleAND immediately
Page 5 of 7
REMOVEthefuel assemblyfromthereactorcore.
4.0
0[3.2]IFthereactorcanbedeterminedtobe
OPERATOR ACTIONS
subcritical
4.1
ANDnoradiologicalhazardisapparent, THEN PLACEthefuelassemblyinaspentfuelstoragepoollocationwiththeleastpossiblenumberof
Immediate Actions
surroundingfuelassemblies,leavingthefuelgrapplelatchedtothe
[1]
fuel assembly handle.0[3.3]IF the reactor CANNOTbedeterminedtobe
STOP all fuel handling.
subcritical
[2]
OR adverseradiologicalconditionsexist, THEN TRAVERSEtherefuelingbridgeandfuel
EVACUATE all non-essential personnel from Refuel Floor.
assemblyawayfromthereactorcore,preferablytotheareaofthecattlechute,AND
4.2
CONTINUEatStep4.1[4].0[4]IF the reactor CANNOTbedeterminedtobe
Subsequent Actions
subcritical
CAUTION
OR adverse radiological
o
conditions
o
exist, THEN EVACUATEtherefuelfloor
The release of iodine is of major concern. If gas bubbles are identified at any time, Iodine
.0  
release should be assumed until RADCON determines otherwise.
(35.RO 245000K6.04 OOI/C/A/TIG 2/0I-35//245000K6.04
[1]
/fRO/SRO/Il/28/07
VERIFY secondary containment is intact.
RMSGiventhefollowingplant
(REFER TO Tech Spec 3.6.4.1)
conditions:*Unit2 i s operatingat100%power.*Main Generatorisat1150MWe.*The Chattanooga
[2]
Load Coordinator
IF any EOI entry condition is met, THEN
requ iresa0.95 lagging power factor.*Generator hydrogen pressureis65psig.Wh ichONEofthe following describestherequiredact
ENTER the appropriate EOI(s).
ion and reason if Generator hydrogen pressuredropsto45psig?
[3]
REFERENCE PROVIDED A.Reduce excitationtoobtaina power factorofunitytomaintain
VERIFY automatic actions.
current generatorload.Poleslippagewillnot occuratthis power factor.Reduce generatorloadbelow800MWe.
[4]
Sufficient
NOTIFY RADCON to perform the following:
cooling capability
n
still existsatthishydrogen
o
pressure.C.Reduce generatorloadbelow800MWe
o
.Poleslippagewillnot
*
occuratthis generator load.D.Reduceexci
EVALUATE the radiation levels.
tationtoobta in a power factorofun itytomain tain current generator load.Suffic ientcoolingcapability st illexistsatthishydrogen
0
pressure.KJA Statement:245000MainTurb
*
ine Gen./Aux.K6.04-Knowledgeofthe
MAKE recommendation for personnel access.
effectthatalossor
0
malfunct ionofthe follow ingwillhaveontheMAIN
*
TURBINE GENERATOR AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS:Hydrogencooling
MONITOR around the Reactor Building Equipment Hatch,
KJA Justification:
at levels below the Refuel Floor, for possible spread of the
This question satisfiestheKIA statementbyrequiringthe
release.
candidatetousespec ificplantcond itions to determine the effectofalossofhydrogen
0
coolingonMa in Generator operation.Reference Provided: Generator Capability
[5]
Curve withoutaxislabeledLevelof Knowledge Justification:
REFER TO EPIP-1 for proper notification.
This questionisratedas CIAduetotherequ
o
irement to assemble , sort , and integratethepartsofthe
 
questiontopredictan
(
outcome.Thisrequi res mentally us ing th is know ledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.0610NRCE xam
(
REFERENCE PROVIDED: Generator Capability
BFN
Curvewithouttheaxislabeled.
Fuel Damage During Refueling
Plausibility
2-AOI-79-1
Analysis:Inorderto answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
Unit 2
1.Current operat ing po intonthe Generator CapabilityCurvebasedongiven
Rev. 0017
condiions.2.Recognizethatpole slippageisonlyaconcernwhenoperatingw
Page 6 of 7
ith a significant
4.2
leading power factor.3.Recognizethatpolesl
Subsequent Actions (continued)
ippageisaresultof
[6]
underexcitation,not
MONITOR radiation levels, for the affected areas, using the
excessive generator load.4.Recognizethat
following radiation recorders and indicators:
generator hydrogen pressure is directlyrelatedtocooling
A.
capability.Aisincorrect.Thisis plausible because reducing excitationDOESreduceheat
2-RR-90-1 (points 1 and 2), 2-MON-90-50 (Address 11),
generationwithinthe generator ,butnot sufficientenoughto prevent generator damage.However,pole
2-RR-90-142 and 2-RR-90-140 (Panel 2-9-2) .
slippageisnotaconcernataunity
0
power factor.Biscorrect.Cis incorrect.Thisis plausible because generatorloadisproperlyreduced,butthebasisforthe
B.
reduction isnotrelatedtoslippingpoles
2-RM-90-142, 2-RM-90-140, 2-RM-90-143
.Dis incorrect.Thisis plausible because reducing excitationDOESreduceheat
and 2-RM-90-141 Detectors A and B (Panel 2-9-10).
generation
0
w ithin thegenerator,butnot
C.
sufficientenoughto prevent generatordamage.Inaddition, insufficient
2-RI-90-1A and 2-RI-90-2A (Panel 2-9-11).
hydrogen pressureexistsatthe
0
current generatorloadevenwiha
D.
power factorofunity.
0-CONS-90-362A (Address 09, 10, 08) for Unit 1, 2,
3-RM-90-250, respectively (Panel 1-9-44).
0
[7]
IF possible, MONITOR portable CAMs &ARMs.
[8]
REQUEST Chemistry to perform 0-SI-4.8.8.2-1 to determine if
iodine concentration has risen.
0
[9]
NOTIFY Reactor Engineering Supervisor, or his designee, and
OBTAIN recommendation for movement and sipping of the
damaged fuel assembly.
0
[10]
OBTAIN Plant Managers approval prior to resuming any fuel
transfer operations.
0
[11]
WHEN condition has cleared AND if required, THEN
RETURN ventilation systems, including SGTS, to normal.
REFER TO 2-01-30A, 2-01-30B, 0-01-30F, 0-01-31,
and 0-01-65.
0
 
(
BFN
Inadvertent Criticality During Incore
2-AOI-79-2
Unit 2
Fuel Movements
Rev. 0013
Page 5 of 8
4.0
OPERATOR ACTIONS
4.1
Immediate Actions
[1 ]
IF unexpected criticality is observed following control rod
withdrawal, THEN
REINSERT the control rod.
0
[2]
IF all control rods CANNOT be fully inserted, THEN
MANUALLY SCRAM the reactor.
0
[3]
IF unexpected criticality is observed following the insertion of a
fuel assembly, THEN
PERFORM the following:
0
[3.1]
VERIFY fuel grapple latched onto the fuel assembly
handle AND immediately REMOVE the fuel assembly
from the reactor core.
0
[3.2]
IF the reactor can be determined to be subcritical AND
no radiological hazard is apparent, THEN
PLACE the fuel assembly in a spent fuel storage pool
location with the least possible number of surrounding
fuel assemblies, leaving the fuel grapple latched to the
fuel assembly handle.
0
[3.3]
IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical
OR adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN
TRAVERSE the refueling bridge and fuel assembly
away from the reactor core, preferably to the area of the
cattle chute, AND CONTINUE at Step 4.1[4].
0
[4]
IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical OR
adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN
EVACUATE the refuel floor.
0
 
(
35. RO 245000K6.04 OOI/C/A/TIG2/0I-35//245000K6.04/fRO/SRO/Il/28/07 RMS
Given the following plant conditions:
*
Unit 2 is operating at 100% power.
*
Main Generator is at 1150 MWe.
*
The Chattanooga Load Coordinator requires a 0.95 lagging power factor.
*
Generator hydrogen pressure is 65 psig.
Which ONE of the following describes the required action and reason if Generator hydrogen pressure
drops to 45 psig?
REFERENCE PROVIDED
A.
Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Pole slippage
will not occur at this power factor.
B~ Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Sufficient cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen
pressure.
C.
Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Pole slippage will not occur at this generator load.
D. Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Sufficient
cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen pressure.
KJA Statement:
245000 Main Turbine Gen. / Aux .
K6.04 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the MAIN TURBINE
GENERATOR AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS : Hydrogen cooling
KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific
plant conditions to determine the effect of a loss of hydrogen cooling on Main Generator operation.
Reference Provided: Generator Capability Curve without axis labeled
Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,
sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requi res mentally using this
knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.
0610 NRC Exam
 
REFERENCE PROVIDED: Generator Capability Curve without the axis labeled.
Plausibility Analysis:
In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:
1. Current operating point on the Generator Capability Curve based on given condiions.
2. Recognize that pole slippage is only a concern when operating with a significant leading power factor.
3. Recognize that pole slippage is a result of under excitation, not excessive generator load.
4. Recognize that generator hydrogen pressure is directly related to cooling capability.
A is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the
generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. However, pole slippage is not a
concern at a unity power factor.
B is correct.
C is incorrect. This is plausible because generator load is properly reduced, but the basis for the
reduction is not related to slipping poles.
D is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the
generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. In addition, insufficient hydrogen
pressure exists at the current generator load even wih a power factor of unity.
}}
}}

Latest revision as of 16:43, 14 January 2025

Feb-Mar 05000259/2008301 Exam Draft RO Written Exam (Part 2 of 4)
ML081370218
Person / Time
Site: Browns Ferry Tennessee Valley Authority icon.png
Issue date: 04/08/2008
From:
NRC/RGN-II/DRS/OLB
To:
Tennessee Valley Authority
References
50-259/08-301 50-259/08-301
Download: ML081370218 (86)


See also: IR 05000259/2008301

Text

(7)

CASx (CASA or CASB) accident signal

(after 5 second delay via BBRX relay)

OPL171.036

Revision 11

Page 24 of 58

-122" RxVL OR

2.45 DWP AND

< 450# RPV

I.

4kV Shutdown Boards

(Normal Power Seeking)

1.

Power sources

a.

4kV supplies to each U1/2 Shutdown Board:

are as follows:

Board

NORMAL Supply

A

Shutdown Bus 1

B

Shutdown Bus 1

C

Shutdown Bus 2

D

Shutdown Bus 2

The first alternate is from the other Shutdown

Bus. The second alternate is from the diesel

generator. The third alternate is from the U3

diesel generators via a U3 Shutdown Board.

b.

There are two possible 4kV supplies to each

U3 Shutdown Board:

Board

NORMAL Supply

3EA

Unit Board 3A

3EB

Unit Board 3A

3EC

Unit Board 3B

3ED

Unit Board 3B

(1)

The first alternate is from the diesel

generators. The U1/2 diesel

generators cannot supply power to the

U3 Shutdown Boards alone. They

may, however, be paralleled with the

U3 diesel generators for backfeed

operation. The tie breaker off the unit 3

Shutdown Board is interlocked as

follows:

Refer to prints

15E-500 series Key

Diagram of STDBY

Aux. Power System

Obj. V.B.6.c

Obj. V.C.1.c

Obj. V.D.6.c

SBO

3

% via bustie

board

%

% via other

SO Bus

7.

Shutdown Board Transfer Scheme

a.

The only automatic transfer of power on a

shutdown board is a delayed (slow) transfer.

In order for the transfer to take place, the bus

transfer control switch (43Sx) must be in

AUTOMATIC.

OPL171.036

Revision 11

Page 31 of 58

Obj. V.B.8.c

Obj. V.C.2.c

Obj. V.D.8.c

Procedural

Adherence when

transferring

boards

(

    • b

(1)

Undervoltage is sensed on the line

side of the normal feeder breaker.

(2)

Voltage is available on the line side of

the alternate feeder breaker.

(3)

The normal feeder breaker then

receives a trip signal.

(4)

A 52b contact on the normal supply

breaker shuts in the close circuit of

the alternate feeder breaker,

indicating that the normal breaker is

open.

(5)

A residual voltage relay shuts in the

close circuit of the alternate supply

breaker, indicating that ooara voltage

bas decayed to less than 30 percent

of normal.

(6)

The alternate supply breaker then

closes.

The shutdown board transfer scheme is

NORMAL seeking. If power is restored

to the line side of the normal feeder

breaker, and if the 43Sx switch is still in

AUTOMATIC, then a "slow" transfer

back to the normal supply will occur.

This will cause momentary power loss

to loads on the bus and ESF actuations

are possible.

Manual High Speed (Fast Transfer)

To fast transfer a shutdown board perform the

following:

Obj. V.B.8.c

Obj. V.C.2.c

Review INPO

SOER 83-06

OPL171.036

Revision 11

Page 32 of 58

(

(1)

Ensure voltage is available from the

Procedural

alternate source.

Adherence

(2)

Place 43Sx switch to MANUAL.

(3)

Place alternate breaker SYNC switch

Self Check

to ON.

(4)

Place alternate supply breaker switch

in CLOSE.

(5)

Place normal supply breaker switch in

TRIP.

(6)

Alternate breaker closes when 52b

Alternate supply is

contact from normal breaker closes,

not a qualified Off-

indicating that breaker has opened. If

site supply

the Alternate Supply from SO Bus is

closed to a Unit 1/2 SID Board, an

Accident Signal will trip it open.

(7)

Turn off SYNC switch.

(8)

DO NOT place 43Sx switch back to

AUTOMATIC (Transfer back to

normal supply would occur).

Note: If the SYNC SW was not ON for

Self Check

the alternate breaker, a delayed

transfer would occur when the

normal breaker opens and the

board residual voltage relay

detects less than 30% voltage,

assuming the alternate breaker's

control switch is held in the

CLOSE position.

c.

Conditions which automatically trip the board

transfer control switch (43Sx) to MANUAL:

(1 )

Normal Feeder Lockout Relay (86-xxx)

(2)

Alternate Feeder Lockout Relay (86-

,xxx)

(3)

Normal Feeder Control Transfer Switch

in EMERGENCY

(4)

Alternate Feeder Control Transfer

-122" RxVL

Switch in EMERGENCY

OR

(

(5)

CASx accident signal

2.45 DWP AND

< 450# RPV

( .


20. RO 262002Al.02 OO l/C/Am/GI/UNIT PREFFERRED/C/A 2.5/2.9/262002AA l.02/BF0530I/RO/SRO/lO/27/2007

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 3 is in a normal lineup.

The following alarm is received :

- UNIT PFD SUPPLY ABNORMAL

It is determined that the alarm is due to the Unit-3 Unit Preferred AC Generator Overvoltage

condition

Which ONE of the following describes the correct result of this condition? Assume NO Operator actions.

A.

Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.

B. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set automatically shuts down.

C~ Unit 3 bkr 1001 trips open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 interlocked open; the MMG set continues to run without

excitation.

D. Unit 3 bkr 1001 interlocked open; Unit 2 bkr 1003 trips open; the MMG set continues to run without

excitation.

KIA Statement:

262002 UPS (AC/DC)

KIA: A1.02 Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the

UNINTERRUPTABLE POWER SUPPLY (A.C./D.C.) controls including: Motor generator outputs.

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to correctly apply

a specific operating condition of the UPS MMG Set to the correct response of the system to that condition.

References: OPL171 .102, Rev.6, pg 20 & 21, 3-ARP-9-8B, Rev.9, tile 35

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to solve a problem. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to resolve the problem .

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. The 1001 and 1003 breakers from an MMG set will trip on overvoltage or underfrequency at the output

of the MMG.

2. Unit 2 MMG Breakers are interlocked to prevent alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at the same time.

3. When an overvoltage condition exists at the Generator Output, the 1001 breaker from the MMG Set

trips.

4. Excitation is lost and the MMG Set continues to run.

5. The Hold to build up voltage switch must be depressed to restore voltage.Also

A is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible because the breaker

lineup is correct.

B is incorrect. The MMG set does not automatically shut down. This is plausible although the breaker

lineup is backwards.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. The breaker lineup is backwards. This is plausible because the MMG Set will continue to

run without excitation.

(

(

BFN

Unit 1

Panel 1-9-8

1-XA-55-8B

Senso rlTrip Point:

1-ARP-9-8B

Rev. 0009

Page 42 of 42

UNIT PFD

SUPPLY

ABNORMAL

(Page 1 of 1)

Relay SE - loss of normal DC power source .

Relay TS - DC Xfer switch transfers to Emergency DC Power Source.

Regulating Transformer Common Alarm.

1-INV-252-001 , INVT-1 System Common Alarm .

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

EL 593' 250V DC Battery Board 2

A.

Loss of normal DC power source

B. DC power transfer.

C. Relay failure

D. INVT-1 System Common Alarms

1.

Fan Failure Rectifier

2.

Over temperature Rectifier

3.

AC Power Failure to Rectifier

4.

Low DC Voltage

5.

High DC Voltage

6.

Low DC Disconnect

7.

Fan Failure Inverter

8.

Alternate Source Failure

9.

Low AC Output Voltage

10. High Output Voltage

11. Inverter Fuse Blown

12. Static Switch Fuse Blown

13. Over Temperature Inverter

E. PFD Regulating XFMR Common Alarms

1.

Transformer Over temperature

2.

Fan Failure

3.

CB1 Breaker Trip

4.

CB2 Breaker Trip

Auto transfer to DC Power Source on Rectifier failure .

Auto transfer to Alternate AC supply (Regulated Transformer) on Inverter failure.

Automatic

A.

Action:

B.

Operator

A.

Action:

B.

IF 120V AC Unit Preferred is lost, THEN

REFER TO 1-AOI-57-4, Loss of Unit Preferred .

REFER TO appropriate portion of 0-OI-57C, 208V/120V AC

Electrical System.

o

o

References:

0-45E641-2

10-100467

1-45E620-11

0-20-100756

1-3300D15A4585-1

20-110437

(

b.

(d)

Another Unit's MMG set

The second alternate is from

another unit's MMG set

output. Unit 2 MMG is the

second alternate for either

Unit 1 or Unit 3; Unit 3 is the

second alternate for Unit 2.

Transfers to this source are

done manually at Battery

Board 2 panel 11.

MMG Sets (Unit 2&3)

(1)

The MMG is normally driven By the

AC motor, powered from 480V

Shutdown Board A. Should this

supply fail, the AC motor is

automatically disconnected and the

DC motor starts, powered from

250V Battery Board. The DC

motor has an alternate power

supply from another 250V Battery

Board. Transfer to the alternate

DC source is manual.

Underfrequency on the generator

output will trip the DC motor.

Transfer of the MMG set back to

the AC motor is manual.

(2)

The 1001 and 1003 breakers from

an MMG set will trip on overvoltage

or underfrequency at the output of

the MMG. Also Unit 2 MMG

Breakers are interlocked to prevent

alternate power to unit 1 and 3 at

the same time.

OPL171.102

Revision 6

Page 20 of 69

Obj. V.B.2.b

TP-11

Obj'v.D.2.c

Obj.V.D.2.d/j

Obj V.E.2.c

Obj'v.E.2.d/i

Obj V.B.2.h

Obj'v.C.3.e

Obj'v.D.2.j

Obj'v.E.2.i

(3)

When an under frequency or

overvoltage condition exists at the

Generator Output the following

occurs

(a)

BB panel 10 breakers from

the MMG Set trip.

OPL171.102

Revision 6

Page 21 of 69

Obj. V.B.2.h

Obj. V.C.3.e

Obj. V.D.2.j

Obj. V.E.2.i

U2

U3

1001 (U2)

1001 (U3)

1003 (U1&3)

1003 (U2)

(b)

Excitation is lost and the

MMG Set continues to run.

(The Hold to build up

voltage switch must be

depressed to restore

voltage.)

(

(

21. RO 263000KI .02 00I/MEMlT2G I1250VDC/3/263000KI .02//RO/SROI

Wh ich ONE of the following statements describes the operation of 250 VDC Battery Charger 2B?

A.

The normal power supply to Battery Charger 2B is 480V Common Board 1.

8.

Battery Charger 2B can supply . directly from unit 2 Battery Board room, any of the six Unit & Plant

250VDC battery boards.

C.

Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying two Battery Boards simultaneously.

0 .01

Load shedding of the battery charger can be bypassed by placing the Emergency ON select

switch in the Emergency ON Position.

KIA Statement:

263000 DC Electrical Distribution

K1.02 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between D.C.

ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and the following: Battery charger and battery

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of battery charger operation.

References:

OPL171.037

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Normal and Alternate power to Battery Charger 2B.

2. Loads capable of being supplied by Battery Charger 2B.

3. Load Shedding logic and bypass capability.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because 480V Common Board 1 is the Alternate supply to Battery

Charger 2B.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is capable of supplying any of the six 250V

Battery Boards, but NOT directly from Unit 2 Battery Board Room.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because Battery Charger 2B is sufficiently large enough to support the

loads, but mechanical interlocks prevent closing more than one output feeder breaker.

D is correct.

(

(2)

The Plant/Station Batteries (4, 5, and 6) are

Class Non-1E and are utilized primarily for U-2,

U-1, and U-3 respectively --for normal loads

OPL 171.037

Revision 10

Page 11 of 70

Obj V.B.1

Obj. V.C.1

Obj. V.D.1

(3)

Battery (4) Room is located on Unit 3 in the

Turbine Building on Elev. 586

(4)

Battery (5 & 6) Rooms are located on the

Turbine Floor, Elev. 617

(5)

The boards and chargers for the Unit Batteries

are located in Battery Board Rooms adjacent

to the batteries they serve, with the spare

charger being in the Unit 2 Battery Board

room. (Battery Boards 5 & 6 and their

associated chargers are located adjacent to

the batteries, but are in the open space of the

turbine floor.)

c.

250V Plant DC components

(1)

Battery charger

(a)

The battery chargers are of the solid state

rectifier type. They normally supply loads

on the 250V Plant DC Distribution

System. Upon loss of power to the

charger, the battery supplies the loads.

(b)

The main bank chargers only provide

float and equalize charge when tied to

their loads. The chargers are not placed

on fast charge (high voltage equalize)

with any loads attached.

(c)

They can recharge a fully discharged

battery in 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> while supplying

normal loads.

(d)

Battery charger power supplies are

Follow Procedure

manual transfer only.

(

250V Battery

Normal Source

Alternate Source

Charaer

(Charger Service bus)

1

480V SD Bd 1A

480V Common Bd 1

Comp 6D

Comp 3A

2A

480V SD Bd 2A

480V Common Bd 1

Comp6D

Comp 3A

2B

480V SD Bd 2B

480V Common Bd 1

Comp6D

Comp 3A

3

480V SD Bd 3A

480V Common Bd 1

Comp 6D

Comp3A

Obj. V.B.2

Obj. V.C.2

Obj V.D.2

(

4

5

480V SO Bd 3B

Com

60

480V Com Bd 1

Com

5C

480V Common Bd 1

Com

3A

(no alternate)

OPL171.037

Revision 10

Page 12 of 70

6

480~o~or;gd 3

(no alternate)

2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four

feeders. Three DC outputs can be connected to battery board 1,

2, or 3. The fourth output is connected to a new output transfer

switch (located in battery board room 4) which charges batteries

4, 5, or 6 plant batteries. A meclianical interlocKpermits closing

only: one output feeaer at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery

board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock is used in battery board

room 4

TP-2 & TP-7

Attention to Detail

(

XI.

Summary

We have discussed in detail the DC Power Systems at BFN.

The electrical design and operation which makes these

systems so reliable has been explained. The various systems

have been described with reference to function, components,

locations, and electrical loads. Power sources have been

identified, and instrumentation has been noted. Significant

control and alarm aspects have also been pointed out.

OPL171.037

Revision 10

Page 31 of 70

250V Battery Charger

Normal Source

Alternate Source

(Charger Service bus)

1

480V SO Bd 1A, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

2A

480V SO Bd 2A Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

2B

480V SO Bd 2B, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

3

480V SO Bd 3A, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

4

480V SO Bd 3B, Comp 60

480V Common Bd 1, Comp 3A

5

480V Com Bd 1 Comp 5C

(no alternate)

6

480V Com Bd 3 Comp 3D

(no alternate)

The 2B spare charger DC output can be directed to any of four feeders. Three DC outputs

can be connected to battery board 1, 2, or 3. The fourth DC output is connected to output

transfer switch (BBR 4) to batteries 4, 5, or 6. Mechanical interlock permits closing only one

output feeder at a time. (A slide bar is utilized in battery board room 2 and a Kirk key interlock

is used in battery board room 4.)

250V DC battery chargers 1, 2A and 2B will load shed upon receipt of a Unit 1 or Unit 2

accident signal and any Unit 1/2 shutdown board being supplied by its respective diesel

generator or cross tied to a Unit 3 shutdown board and a unit three Diesel Generator. 250

VDC Battery Charger 3 will load shed on a unit 3 load shed signal.

e oad shedding feature

can be b~ssed by. placing the "Emergency" switCii on the charger. to tfie "EMERG" P.Qsition.

Station Battery charger 4 does not have load shed logic; however, battery charger 4 will

deenergize when 3B 480 SID Board deenergizes and will return when the 480V SID Board

voltage returns.

They also supply alternate control power for Units 1 and 2 4kV Shutdown Boards; however, on

Unit 3, the A, C, and 0 4kV Shutdown Boards receive both normal and alternate control power

from the 250V DC Unit Systems. (3EB receives alternate control power only.) The 250V DC

RMOV Boards are supplied from the Unit Battery Board as follows:

BB-1 supplies 250V RMOV Boards 1A, 2C, 3B.

BB-2 supplies 250V RMOV Bds 2A, 1C, 3C.

OPL171.037

Revision 10

Page 47 of70

(

-

=

=
=

..=.

-

-

-

480vSO BO 1A

NOR

............

BATTERY

CHARGER

No.1

ALT

............

480v SO B02A

............

BATTERY

CHARGER

No.2A

ALT

.............

480v SO BO 2B

NOR

............

BATTERY

~

CHARGER

en

No.2B

0:w

u..

ALT

enz

1************-

~I-

480v SO B03A

~

0..

I-

NOR

)

,.-------.---i

0

I

aJ

BATTERY

N

CHARGER

0

I-

No.3

ALT

............;

480v SO BO 3B

NOR

BATTERY

CHARGER t--------+-----+--+----i--+---;--i----+---+-____

NO.4

1-----' ALT

BATT

BO 1

BATT

B02

BATT

B03

BATT

B04

480v

COMMON

BO 1

..............._..

..................

TP-2

250V DC Power Distribution

(

(

22. RO 264000K5.06 00 l/C/A/T2Gl/82 - DG/9/264000K5.06//RO/SRO/

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 2 is operating at Full Power.

No Equipment is Out of Service.

A large leak occurs in the drywell and the following conditions exist:

- Drywell Pressure peaked at 28 psig and is currently at 20 psig.

- Reactor Pressure is at 110 psig.

- Reactor Water Level is at -120 inches

- Offsite power is available.

Which ONE of the following describes the proper loading sequence and associated equipment?

A. II 28 RHR and 28 Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.

B.

RHRSW pumps lined up for EECW start at 14 seconds after the accident signal is received.

c.

Core Spray pumps (2A, 28, 2C, 2D) start immediately when voltage is available on the respective

shutdown board.

D.

2C RHR and 2C Core Spray pumps start at 7 seconds after the accident signal is received.

KIA Statement:

264000 EDGs

K5.06 - Knowledge of the operational implications of the following concepts as they apply to

EMERGENCY GENERATORS (DIESEUJET): Load sequencing

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions and times to correctly determine the effect of.load sequencing on plant equipment

supplied by the Emergency Generators.

References:

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Load Sequencing is NVA (Normal Voltage Available) and NOT DGVA (DIG Voltage Available).

2. Based on Item 1 above, theproper load sequencing with a Common Accident Signal (CAS) on Unit-2

alone and NOT in addition to a CAS on Unit 1.

A is correct.

B is incorrect. This is plusible because RHRSW pumps all start at 14 seconds if load sequencing is

DGVA.

C is incorrect. This is plausible based on Load Sequencing logic prior to a modification for Unit 1 restart

activities.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because 2-01-74 P&L 3.2.B defines the start time as 7 second

"intervals".

(

(

b.

(2)

Opens diesel output breakers if shut.

If normal voltage is available, load will

sequence on as follows: (NVA)

OPL171.038

Revision 16

Page 38 of63

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

ou.v.s.s

ou.v.c.e

Obj.v.D.15

oejv.s. 15

Time After Accident

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

A

C

B

D

, 0-

RHR/GS-A_ l

7

RHR/CS B

14

RHR/CS C

21

RHR/CS D

28

RHRSW

RHRSW

RHRSW*

RHRSW

  • RHRSW pumps assigned for. EECW automatic start

c.

If

ormal voltage is NeT-available: (DGVA)

(1)

After 5-second time delay, all4kV

Shutdown Board loads except

4160/480V transformer breakers are

automatically tripped.

(2)

Diesel generator output breaker closes

when diesel is at speed.

ouv.e.s

ouv.c.e

c.

(3)

Loads sequence as indicated below

Time After Accident

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

SID Board

A

B

C

D

0

RHR A

RHR C

RHR B

RHR D

7

CSA

CS C

CS B

CS D

14

RHRSW*

RHRSW*

RHRSW*

RHRSW*

  • RHRSW pumps assigned for EECW automatic start

d.

Certain 480V loads are shed whenever an

accident signal is received in conjunction with

the diesel generator tied to the board. (see

OPL171.072)

(

(

BFN

Residual Heat Removal System

2-01-74

Unit 2

Rev. 0133

Page 17 of 367

3.2

LPCI (continued)

B.

Upon an automatic LPCI initiation with normal power available, RFiR P-ump 2~

starts immeaiately. and 2B, 2C, 2D sequentially start at 7 second intervals.

Otherwise, all RHR pumps start immediately once diesel power is available

(and normal power unavailable).

C.

Manually stopping an RHR pump after LPCI initiation disables automatic restart

of that pump until the initiation signal is reset. The affected RHR pump can still

be started manually.

3.3

Shutdown Cooling

A.

Prior to initiating Shutdown Cooling, RHR should be flushed to Radwaste until

conductivity is less than 2.0 micromho/cm with less than 0.1 ppm chlorides

(unless directed otherwise by 2-AOI-74-1, Loss of Shutdown Cooling). If CS&S

has been aligned as the keep fill source for two days or more a chemistry

sample should be requested and results analyzed to determine if flushing is

required.

B.

When in Shutdown Cooling, reactor temperature should be maintained greater

than 72°F and only be controlled by throttling RHRSW flow. This is to assure

adequate mixing of reactor water.

1.

[NER/C] Reactor vessel water temperatures below 68°F exceed the

temperature reactivity assumed in the criticality analysis.

[INPO SER 90-017]

2.

[NER/C] Maintaining water temperature below 100°F minimizes the release of

soluble activity.

[GE SIL 541]

C.

Shutdown Cooling operation at saturated conditions (212°F) with 2 RHR pumps

operating at or near combined maximum flow (20,000 gpm) could cause Jet

Pump Cavitation. Indications of Jet Pump Cavitation are as follows:

1.

Rise in RHR System flow without a corresponding rise in Jet Pump flow.

2.

Fluctuation of Jet Pump flow.

3.

Louder "Rumbling" noise heard when vessel head is off.

Corrective action for any of these symptoms would be to reduce RHR flow until

the symptom is corrected.

(

23. RO 300000K2.02 001/MEM/T2Gl/CAI1300000K2.02/2.8/2.8/RO/SR0/1l/16/07 RMS

Which ONE of the follow ing describes the power supplies to the Control and Service Air Compressor

motors?

A.

"A" and "8" are fed from the 480V Common 8d. #1

"C" and "0" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28 , respectively

"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480 SO 8d. 2A

"E" from the 480V Common 8d. #1

B.

"A" and "0" from 480V Common 8d . 1

"8" and "C" from 480V SID 8d. 18 & 28, respectively

"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A

"F" from 480V Common 8d. #3

C.

"A" from 480V SID 8d. 18

"8" and "F" from 480V Common 8d. #3

"C" from 480V SID 8d. 1A

"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A

"G" from 4KV Common 8d.#2

0. 01 "A" from 480V SID 8d. 18

"8" and "C" from 480V Common 8d . #1

"0" from 480V SID 8d. 2A

"G" from 4KV SID 8d. 8 and 480V RMOV 8d. 2A

"E" from 480V Common 8d. #3

KJA Statement:

300000 Instrument Air

.

K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Emergency air compressor

KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of the power supplies of ALL air compressors.

References:

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Power supplies to six air compressors.

NOTE: Regarding plausibility, all the power supplies listed in the distractors are capable of supplying

power to each air compressor.

A is incorrect. B, G & E are correct. A, C & D are incorrect.

B is incorrect. F & G are correct. A, B, C, & D are incorrect.

C is incorrect. A, D & F are correct. B, C &G are incorrect

D is correct.

(

(

X. Lesson Body

A. Control Air System

1. **The purpose of the Control Air System is to process

and distribute oil-free control air, dried to a low dew point

and free of foreign materials. This high-quality air is

required throughout the plant and yard to ensure the

proper functioning of pneumatically operated

instruments, valves, and final operators.

2. Basic Description of Flow Path

a. The station control air system has 5 air compressors,

each designed for continuous operation.

b. Common header (fed by air compressors A-D and G)

(1) The control air system is normally aligned with the

G air compressor running and loaded. The

existing A-D air compressors are aligned with one

in second lead , one in third lead, and at least one

compressor in standby.

(2) 3 control air receivers

(3) 4 dual dryers One for each unit's control air

header (units 1, 2 & 3 through their 4-inch

headers) and One standby dryer supplies the

standby, 3- inch common control air header for all

three units

(4) Outlet from large service air receiver is connected

to the control air receivers through a pressure

control valve 0-FCV-33-1, which will automatically

open to supply service air to the control air

header if control air pressure falls to 85 psig.

c. 4-inch control air header (1 per unit) is supplied from

each unit dryer and backed up by a common, 3-inch

standby header.

3. Control Air System Component Description

a. Four Reciprocating Air Compressors A-D (2-stage,

double acting, V-type) are located EI 565, U-1

Turbine Building.

(1) Supply air to the control air receivers at 610 scfm

each at a normal operating pressure of 90 - 101

psig.

(2) 480V, 60 Hz, 3-phase, drive motors

(3) Power supplies

A from 480V Shutdown Board 1B

OPL171.054

Revision 12

Page 9 of 72

Obj. V.E.1

TP-1

Obj. V.E.3

Obj. V.D.1

The G air compressor

will be discussed later in

this section of the lesson

plan.

normally aligned to all

three units

TP-1

(

o from 480V Shutdown Board 2A

B from 480V Common Board 1

C from 480V Common Board 1

(a) Control air compressors which are powered

from the 480 VAC shutdown boards are

tripped automatically due to:

i.

under voltage on the shutdown board.

ii.

load shed logic during an accident signal

concurrent with a loss of offsite power.

NOTE: The compressors must be

restarted manually after power is restored

to the board.

(b) Units powered from common boards also trip

due to under voltage.

(4) Lubrication provided from attached oil system via

gear-type oil pump

(a) Compressor trips on

lube oil pressure < 10 psig

or

lube oil temperature >180 of

(b) Compressor cylinder is a non lubricated type

(5) Cooling water is from the Raw Cooling Water

system with backup from EECW

(a) Compressor oil cooler, compressor inter-

cooler, after cooler and cylinder water jackets

(b) Compressor inter-cooler and after cooler

moisture traps drain moisture to the Unit 1

station sump .

NOTE: Cooling water flows to the compressors are regulated

such that the RCW outlet temperature is maintained

between 70° F and 100° F. Outlet temperatures

should be adjusted low in the band (high flow rates)

during warm seasons (river temps. ~ 70°F). Outlet

temperatures should be adjusted high in the band

during the cooler seasons (river temps ~ 70°F) to

reduce condensation in the cylinders.

(c) Compressor auto trips if discharge

temperature of air> 310° F.

b. Unloaders

OPL171 .054

Revision 12

Page 10 of 72

Obj. V.B.1.

Obj. V.C.1.

Obj. V.B.2.

Obj. V.C.2.

Obj. V.E.12

Obj. V.D.10

Obj. V.B.2.

Obj. V.C.2.

Obj. V.E.12

Obj. V.D .10

(

(b) Should both the primary and the backup

controllers fail, all four compressors will come

on line at full load until these pressure

switches cause the compressors to unload at

112 psig.

(c) When air pressure drops below the high

pressure cutoff setpoint (110.8 psig), the

compressors will again come on line at full

load until the high pressure cutoff switches

cause the compressors to unload.

d. Relief valves on the compressors discharge set at

120 psig protects the compressor and piping.

e. G Air Compressor - centrifugal type, two stage

(1) Located 565' EL Turbine Bldg. , Unit 1 end.

Control Air Compressor G is the primary control

air compressor and provides most of the control

air needed for normal plant operation.

(2) Rated at 1440 SCFM @ 105 psig.

(3) Power Supply

(a) 4 kV Shutdown Board B supplies power to

the compressor motor.

(b) 480 V RMOV Bd. 2A Supplies the following :

Pre lube pump

Oil reservoir heater

Cooling water pumps

Panel(s) control power

Auto Restart circuit

(c) Except for short power interruptions on the

480v RMOV Bd, Loss of either of these two

power supplies will result in a shutdown of the

G air compressor.

(4) A complete description of the G Air compressor

controls and indications can be found in 0-01-32.

(The G and the F air compressor indications and

Microcontrollers are similar).

(a) UNLOAD MODULATE AUTO DUAL

handswitch is used to select the mode of

operation for the compressor

OPL171.054

Revision 12

Page 14 of 72

Cutout switch setpoints

are set at 112 psig to

prevent spurious

operation when G air

compressor running

Cover 01 illustrations

TP-8

3. Component Description

a. Compressors E and F (EL 565, U-3 Turbine Building)

are designated for service air.

b. The F air compressor is rated for approximately 630

SCFM @ 105 psig, centrifugal type, 2 stages

c. The power supply for both compressors is 480VAC

Common Board 3.

d. FIG air compressor comparison

(1) Controls are similar to that of the G air

compressor. There is no 4KV breaker control on

the F air compressor control panel.

(2) Control system modulates discharge air pressure

in the same manner as is done on the G air

compressor.

(3) Air system is similar to the G air compressor. A

difference is that the 2 stages of compression are

driven by one shaft for the F air compressor. On

the G air compressor, there is a separate drives;

one for each of 3 compression stages.

(4) Oil system similar to that on the G air compressor

with exception of location of components and

capacity. E compressor has an electric oil pump

that runs whenever control power is on.

(5) Cooling system is similar to that on the G air

compressor with exception of flow rate, location,

and capacity of components.

(6) Loss of power will result in F air compressor trip,

loss of the pre lube pump, and the cooling water

pumps .

(7) Restart of the compressor can be accomplished

once the compressor has come to a full stop and

any trip conditions cleared and reset.

e. AlarmslTrips

(1) The Alert and Shutdown setpoints for the Fair

compressor are listed in 0-01-33.

OPL171.054

Revision 12

Page 30 of 72

Obj. V.E.6

Obj. V.DA

TP-16

ouv.s.r

Obj. V.D.5

Set to control at approx.

95 psig - Relief Valve is

set to lift at.~ 115 psig.

TP-17

TP-18

TP-19

See for latest setpoints

(

24. RO 300000K3.01 00 lIelA/T2G lISGT/B 1OB/300000K3.0113.2/3A/RO/SRO/l l/l 6/07 RMS

A LOCA has occurred on Unit 1 and the drywell is being vented to SBGT, when a loss of the Control Air

system occurs.

Which ONE of the following describes the operation of vent valves 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD

ISOL VALVE and 1-FCV-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT?

A.

Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will fail close and can not be operated .

8.

Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line

with no operator action required.

C.oI Both vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 will auto swap to control from the CAD supply line,

however CAD supply must be manually aligned from the control room.

D.

The CAD system must be manually initiated and then vent valves 1-FCV-64-29 & 1-FCV-84-19 may

be realigned to the CAD supply.

KIA Statement:

300000 Instrument Air

K3.01 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the

(INSTRUMENT AIR SYSTEM) will have

on the following: Containment air system

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the effect on the containment air system due to a loss of Control Air.

References: 1-EOI Appendicies 8G and 12, 1-AOI-32-2

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. Whether the vent valves automatically swap to be supplied by CAD or must be manually aligned.

2. Whether CAD supply to DW Control Air automatically swaps or must be manually aligned.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves DO fail closed, however, they can be operated

with manual alignment of the CAD Tanks.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because the vent valves will auto swap to control from the CAD supply

line, however the CAD tanks must be manually aligned.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible becase the CAD system must be manually initiated, however once this is

accomplished, no further alignment is necessary.

(

BFN

1*EOI APPENDIX*12

UNIT 1

PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING

Rev. 0

Page 4 ofa

f.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating

approximately 100 scfm.

g.

CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.

10.

VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, as

follows:

a.

VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141 , DRYWELL DP COMP

BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).

b.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-36, SUPPR CHBR/DW VENT

ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).

c.

VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-29, DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL

VALVE (Panel 1-9-54).

d.

PLACE 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO

with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).

e.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-19, 1-FCV-84-19 CONTROL, in

OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).

f.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-19, PATH B VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating

approximately 100 scfm.

g.

CONTINUE in this procedure at step 12.

11.

VENT the Drywell using 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, as

follows:

a.

VERIFY CLOSED 1-FCV-64-141, DRYWELL DP COMP

BYPASS VALVE (Panel 1-9-3).

b.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-35, SUPPR CHBR I DWVENT

ISOL BYP SELECT, to DRYWELL position (Panel 1-9-54).

c.

VERIFY OPEN 1-FCV-64-31, DRYWELL INBD ISOL VALVE

(Panel 1-9-54).

d.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, in AUTO

with setpoint at 100 scfm (Panel 1-9-55).

e.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-20, 1-FCV-84-20 ISOLATION

BYPASS, in BYPASS (Panel 1-9-55).

f.

VERIFY 1-FIC-84-20, PATH A VENT FLOW CONT, is indicating

approximately 100 scfm.

(

1-EOI APPENDIX-12

Rev. 0

BFN

PRIMARY CONTAINMENT VENTING

Page 7 of 8

UNIT 1

AITACHMENT 1

...J

...J

~o

3:

0

ws

en

2"

It:

I-

W

o

&,

64-34

>

en

.....

0

0

~

~

I-

c>>

A-

N

N

E

....

0

'?

W

eo

-e

.....

eo

en>-

-

en

I

.....z

I

w>

'---

~

'"

0

0

'"

'?

0

....

-e

eo

eo

9£-\\79

~

en

we::

ClW

e::~i

~-

Q.u.

...Jo

o

...JZ

o

w<

0

~en

gz

...J en

>-z

alO

al z

e::<

e::i=1-

e::<

Ou.

Ou.

o~en

1-1-

I

I-_~

tl en

tll-<

i5~

i5 Z J:

wx

e::~ <;

e::>w

ox

I-W

(

BFN

CROSSTIE CAD TO

1-EOI APPENDIX-8G

UNIT 1

DRYWELL CONTROL AIR

Rev. 0

Page 1 of 2

LOCATION:

Unit 1 Control Room

ATTACHMENTS:

None

1.

OPEN the following valves:

0-FCV-84-5, CAD A TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE

(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-54)

0-FCV-84-16, CAD B TANK N2 OUTLET VALVE

(Unit 1, Panel 1-9-55).

2.

VERIFY 0-PI-84-6, VAPOR A OUTLET PRESS, and 0-PI-84-17,

VAPOR B OUTLET PRESS, indicate approximately 100 psig

Panel 1-9-54 and Panel 1-9-55).

3.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW

CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-54).

4.

CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-48, CAD A CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL

AIR, (Panel 1-9-54).

5.

PLACE keylock switch 1-HS-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW

CONTROL AIR, in OPEN (Panel 1-9-55).

6.

CHECK OPEN 1-FSV-84-49, CAD B CROSS TIE TO DW CONTROL

AIR (Panel 1-9-55).

7.

CHECK MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,

1-PA-32-31, alarm cleared (1-XA-55-3D, Window 18).

8.

IF

MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW,

1-PA-32-31, annunciator is or remains in alarm

(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18),

THEN

DETERMINE which Drywell Control Air header is

depressurized as follows:

a.

DISPATCH personnel to Unit 1, RB, EI 565 ft, to MONITOR the

following indications for low pressure:

1-PI-084-0051, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS

indicator, for CAD A (RB, EI. 565, by Drywell Access

Door),

1-PI-084-0050, DW CONT AIR N2 SUPPLY PRESS

indicator, for CAD B (RB, EI. 565, left side of 480V RB

Vent Board 1B).

(~

(

BFN

Loss Of Control Air

1-AOI-32-2

Unit 1

Rev. 0001

Page 5 of 27

2.0

SYMPTOMS (continued)

REACTOR CHANNEL A(B) AUTO SCRAM annunciator, (1-XA-55-5B,

Window 1(2)) in alarm.

MAIN STEAM RELIEF VLV AIR ACCUM PRESS LOW annunciator,

(1-XA-55-3D, Window 18) in alarm.

3.0

AUTOMATIC ACTIONS

A.

U-1 TO U-2 CONT AIR CROSSTIE, 1-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE to separate

Units 1 & 2 when control Air Header Control Air Header pressure reaches

65 psig lowering at the valve.

B.

UNIT 2 TO UNIT 3 CONTROL AIR CROSSTIE, 2-PCV-032-3901, will CLOSE

to separate Units 2 and 3 when Control Air Header pressure reaches 65 psig

lowering at the valve.

C.

CAD SUPPLY PRESS REGULATOR, 1-PCV-084-0706, will select nitrogen

from CAD Tank A at s 75 psig Control Air pressure to supply the following:

1.

SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0020

2.

SUPPR CHBR VAC RELIEF VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0021

D.

INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0033, will select nitrogen from CAD

Tank A to supply the following:

1.

DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,

1-FSV-084-0019

2.

DRYWELL VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0029

3.

SUPPR CHMBR VENT INBD ISOL VALVE, 1-FSV-064-0032

E.

INST GAS SELECTOR VALVE, 1-PCV-084-0034, will select nitrogen from CAD

Tank B to supply the following:

1.

DRYWELL OR SUPPRESS CHMBR EXHAUST TO SGTS,

1-FSV-084-0020

2.

DRYWELL INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0031

3.

SUPPR CHBR INBD ISOLATION VLV, 1-FSV-064-0034.

(

BFN

Loss Of Control Air

1-AOI-32-2

Unit 1

Rev. 0001

Page 7 of 27

4.2

Subsequent Actions (continued)

NOTE

CNDS BSTR PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1C, 1-FCV-002-0029A and CNDS BSTR

PMPS DISCH BYPASS TO COND 1B, 1-FCV-002-0029B both fail CLOSED on a loss of

control air.

[3]

IF there is NOT a flow path for Condensate system, THEN

STOP the Condensate Pumps and Condensate Booster

Pumps. REFER TO 1-01-2.

[4]

IF any Outboard MSIV closes, THEN

PLACE the associated handswitch on Panel 1-9-3 in the

CLOSE position.

NOTE

RSW STRG TNK ISOLATION, 0-FCV-25-32, fails CLOSED on loss of control air.

o

o

[5]

START a High Pressure Fire Pump. REFER TO 0-01-26.

0

[6]

OPEN CAD SYSTEM A N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-5, at

Panel 1-9-54.

0

[7]

OPEN CAD SYSTEM B N2 SHUTOFF VALVE, 0-FCV-84-16,

at Panel 1-9-55.

0

[8]

CHECK RCW pump motor amps and PERFORM Steps

4.2[8.1] through 4.2[8.5]to reduce RCW flow:

(

25. RO 400000A2.02 OO l/C/A/T2G I/RBCCW//400000A2 .02/3.8/4.I/RO/SRO/ll/l6/07 RMS

With Unit 2 operating at power, the following changes are observed:

- RBCCW Temperature lower than normal.

- Annunciator 2-XA-55-4C-6 RBCCW Surge Tank High Level is in alarm.

Which ONE of the following describes a cause for these indications and the corrective action required?

A.

Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak into RBCCW. Trip and isolate the Recirculation Pump.

B.oI

RCW leak in the RBCCW heat exchanger(s). Remove RBCCW from service following unit

shutdown.

C.

RWCU leak into RBCCW via non-regenerative heat exchanger. Isolate RWCU.

D.

Drywell equipment drain sump heat exchanger leak into RBCCW. Isolate DW Equipment Drain

Sump heat exchanger.

KIA Statement:

400000 Component Cooling Water

A2.02 - Ability to (a) predict the impacts of the following on the CCWS and (b) based on those

predictions, use procedures to correct, control, or mitigate the consequences of those abnormal

operation: High/low surge tank level

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the effect of a leak into the RBCCW system and determine which procedure

addresses this condition .

References:

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Which leak path would provide the indications given in the question stem.

2. What actions would be required to mitigate the problem .

NOTE: All distractors are plausible leak paths into RBCCW but would indicate higher temperatures.

A is incorrect. A Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.

B is Correct.

C is incorrect. A RWCU leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.

D is incorrect. A DW Equipment Drain Sump HX leak would cause RBCCW temperature to rise.

(

BFN

Unit 1

RBCCW

SURGE TANK

LEVEL HIGH

1-LA-70-2A

(Page 1 of 2)

Panel 9-4

1-XA-55-4C

SensorlTrip Point:

1-LS-070-0002A

1-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0015

Page 12 of 43

4 Inches Above Center Line of Tank

c.

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Operator

Action:

RBCCW surge tank on the fourth floor in the M-G set room .

A.

Makeup valve 1-FCV-70-1 open.

B. Bypass valve 1-2-1369 leaking.

<'S. Leak into the system.

None

A. VERIFY make-up valve 1-FCV-70-1 closed, using RBCCW SYS

SURGE TANK FILL VALVE, 1-HS-70-1 , on Panel 1-9-4.

B. CHECK RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP, 1-TIS-70-3,

indicates water temperature is 100°F or less, on Panel 1-9-4.

C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level, ensure bypass valve,

1-2-1369, is closed and observe sight glass level.

D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 1-70-609, then CLOSE valve when

desired level is obtained.

E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma

activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.

F.

CHECK activity reading on RM-90-131D.

Continued on Next Page

o

o

o

o

o

o

(

BFN

Unit 1

Panel 9-4

1-XA-55-4C

1-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0015

Page 13 of 43

RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 1-LA-70-2A, Window 6

(Page 2 of 2)

Operator

Action:

(Continued)

NOTE

[NERlC] Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 1-RM-90-131

(Panel 1-9-10) activity (1-RR-90-131/132 Panel 1-9-2) or 1-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature

(Panel 1-9-21) or lowering of any Recirc pump seal pressure.

G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is

leaking, THEN

PERFORM the following:

DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and at

the discretion of the Unit Supervisor, ISOLATE. REFER TO

1-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable. COOLDOWN is

required to prevent hanger or shock suppressors from exceeding

their maximum travel range.

0

WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig and at the

discretion of the Unit Supervisor, THEN

ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the

RBCCW PIPING.[IEN 89-054, GE SIL-459)

0

H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source, if present.

0

(

References:

1-45E620-4

1-47E610-70-1

FSAR Section 10.6.4 and 13.6.2

26. RO 400000G2.4.31 00 lICfA/T2G1IRBCCWff4000002.4.3Of/ROfSRO/NO

Unit 3 is at 100% rated power with the following indications :

RECIRC PUMP MTR B TEMP HIGH (3-ARP-9-4B W13) in alarm.

RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W17) in alarm.

RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH (3-ARP-9-4C W6) in alarm.

RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (3-ARP-9-3A W22) in alarm.

RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP recorder 3-TR-68-84 is reading 170 of and

rising.

RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP 3-TIS-70-3 is reading 140 of and rising.

RWCU NON-REGENERATIVE HX DISCH TEMP HIGH in alarm.

AREA RADIATION MONITOR RE-90-13 and RE-90-14 are in alarm reading 55 mrlhr and rising.

Which ONE of the following describes the action(s) that should be taken?

REFERENCE PROVIDED

A. 01

Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Commence a

normal shutdown and cooldown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .

B.

Enter 3-EOI-3, Secondary Containment Control. Trip and isolate 3B Recirc Pump. Enter 3-EOI-1,

RPV Control at Step RC-1.

C.

Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system. Close RBCCW Sectionalizing Valve 3-FCV-70-48

to isolate non-essential loads and maximize cooling to 3B Recirc. Pump. EOI entry is not required.

D.

Enter 3-EOI-3 , Secondary Containment Control. Trip RWCU pumps and isolate RWCU system.

Commence a normal shutdown in accordance with 3-GOI-100-12A, Unit Shutdown .

KIA Statement:

400000 Component Cooling Water

2.4.31 - Emergency Procedures I Plan Knowledge of annunciators alarms and indications, and use of the

response instructions.

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the corrective actions required due to an emergency involving RBCCW

based on annunciators and indications.

References:

3-EOI-3 flowchart, 3-ARP 9-3 and 3-ARP-9-4

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

(

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: 3-EOI-3 flowchart

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. EOI Entry is required solely based on ARM alarms.

2. Location of the leak is from the 3B Recic Pump.

3. RWCU temperature indications are due to insufficient cooling by RBCCW, not a RWCU leak.

4. Appropriate actions per 3-EOI-3 are to isolate the leak and monitor radiation levels.

5. Justification for Unit Shudwon and Cooldown are due to the Recirc Loop being isolated at rated

temperature and pressure (pipe hanger and support issue), and NOT Directed by 3-EOI-3.

A is correct.

B is incorrect. Entering 3-EOI-1 to initiate a scram is NOT required until radiation levels approach 1000

mr/hr in any area. This is plausible becuase the location of the leak and required isolation are correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the

temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. If RWCU was the leak location, the

RBCCW temperature would not be high enough to provide the given indications. The leak would have to

have occurred in the NRHX which is below the indicated RBCCW temperature.

D is incorrect. This is plausible if the candidate incorrectly determines that RWCU is causing the

temperature issues with 3B Recirc Pump and not vice versa. In addition to the justification above,

commencing a shutdown in accordance with 3-EOI-3 is not appropriate until ARMs indicate greater than

1000 mr/hr.

(

(

OPL171.047

Revision 12

Appendix C

Page 35 of 41

DEMIN

WATER ----.,r-I~>l<lh

MAKEUP

DRW

.................. ................

RCW

t-_........U2

TCV'S

RCW

.""",,~n TCV'S

RCW

  • ,II1II""**"" TCV'S

RCW

I&lfiI~~**~~f:J---+-"OUTLET

626

623

0-70-607

601

U2-11.....-1

RBCCW

RETURN",--====-__J

HEADER

CHEMICAL

FEED

633

RBCCW

SUPPLY

HEADER

70

69

638

U3

67

68

'--........ U3

U2

TP-1: RBCCW SYSTEM FLOW DIAGRAM

(

8FN

Unit 3

Panel 9-4

3-XA-55-48

3-ARP-9-48

Rev. 0036

Page 17 of 45

RECIRC

PUMP MTR B

TEMP HIGH

3-TA-68-84

(Page 1 of 1)

SensorlTrip Point:

Alarm is from 3-TR-68-84, Panel 3-9-2

3-TE-68-73A RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG UPPER FACE (190°F)

3-TE-68-73C RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-THR BRG LOWER FACE (190°F)

3-TE-68-73E RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-UPPER GUIDE BRG (190°F)

3-TE-68-73N RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-LOWER GUIDE BRG (190°F)

3-TE-68-73G RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING A (216°F)

3-TE-68-73J RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING B (216°F)

3-TE-68-73L RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-MOTOR WINDING C (216°F)

3-TE-68-73T RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.2 CAVITY(180°F)

3-TE-68-73U RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-SEAL NO.1 CAVITY(180°F)

3-TE-68-67 RECIRC PMP MTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG (140°F)

3-TE-68-70 RECIRC PMPMTR 3B-CLG WTR FROM BRG (140°F)

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Temperature elements are located on recirculation pump motor, Elevation 563.12,

Unit 3 drywell.

A. Possible bearing failure.

B. Possible motor overload.

C. Insufficient cooling water.

D. Possible seal failure.

E. High drywell temperature.

None

Operator

Action:

A. . CHECK following on Panel 3-9-4:

RBCCW PUMP SUCTION HDR TEMP temperature indicating

switch, 3-TIS-70-3 normal (summer 70-95°F, winter 60-80°F).

RBCCW PRI CTMT OUTLET handswitch, 3-HS-70-47A

(3-FCV-70-47) OPEN.

o

o

o

B. CHECK the temperature of the cooling water leaving the seal and

bearing coolers < 140°F on RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND

BRG TEMP temperature recorder, 3-TR-68-84 on Panel 3-9-21.

0

C. LOWER recire pump speed until Bearing and/or Winding

temperatures are below the alarm setpoint.

0

D. CONTACT Site Engineering to PERFORM a complete assessment

and monitoring of all seal conditions particularly seal leakage,

temperature, and pressure of all stages for Recirc Pump seal

temperatures in excess of 180°F.

0

References:

3-45E620-5

GE 731E320RE

3-47E610-68-1

3-SIMI-68B

Tech Spec 3.4.1

FSAR Section 13.6.2

(

BFN

Unit3

RBCCW EFFLUENT

RADIATION

HIGH

3-RA-90-131 A

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

SensorlTrip Point:

RE-90-131D

ill

(NOTE 2)

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 25 of 51

HI-HI

(NOTE 2)

(Page 1 of 2)

Hi alarm from recorder

Hi-Hi alarm from drawer

(2)

Chemlab should be contacted for current setpoints per 0-TI-45.

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

RE-90-131A RBCCW HX Rx Bldg, EI593, R-20 S-L1NE

HX tube leak into RBCCW system.

None

Operator

Action:

A.

DETERMINE cause of alarm by observing following:

1.

RBCCWand RCW EFFLUENT RADIATION recorder,

3-RR-90-131/132 Red pen on Panel 3-9-2.

2.

RBCCW EFFLUENT OFFLINE RAD MON, 3-RM-90-131D on

Panel 3-9-10.

o

o

B. NOTIFY Chemistry to sample RBCCW for total gamma activity to

verify condition.

0

C. START an immediate investigation to determine if source of leak is

RWCU Non-regenerative, Fuel Pool Cooling, Reactor Water Sample

or RWCU Recirc Pump 3A or 3B Seal Water heat exchanger(s).

0

D.

(NERlC] CHECK Following for indication of Reactor Recirculation

Pump Seal Heat Exchanger leak:

1.

LOWERING in reactor Recirculation pump 3A(3B) NO.1 or 2

SEAL, 3-PI-68-64A or 3-PI-68-63A (3-PI-68-76A or 3-PI-68-75A)

on Panel 3-9-4.

0

2.

Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-54, on

RECIRC PMP MTR 3A WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature

recorder, 3-TR-68-58, on Panel 3-9-21.

0

3.

Temperature rise on CLG WTR FROM SEAL CLG TE-68-67, on

RECIRC PMP MTR 3B WINDING AND BRG TEMP temperature

recorder, 3-TR-68-84, on Panel 3-9-21.

0

Continued on Next Page

(

BFN

Unit 3

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 26 of 51

RBCCW EFFLUENT RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-131A, Window 17

(Page 2 of 2)

Operator

Action: (Continued)

E. IF it is determ ined the source of leakage is from Reactor Recirc

Pump A(B), THEN

1.

ISOLATE Reactor Recirculation Loop A(B) per 3-01-68, as

applicable.

0

NOTE

Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors from exceeding their maximum travel

range.

2.

WHEN primary system pressure is less than 125 psig, THEN

ISOLATE RBCCW System to preclude damage to RBCCW

piping.

[lEN 89-054 , GE SIL-459)

0

References:

3-45E620-3

3-47E610-90-3

GE 3-729E814-3

BFN

Unit3

RX BLDG AREA

RADIATION

HIGH

3-RA-90-1D

(Page 1 of 2)

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

SensorlTrip Point:

RI-90-4A

RI-90-8A

RI-90-9A

RI-90-13A

RI-90-14A

RI-90-20A

RI-90-21A

RI-90-22A

RI-90-23A

RI-90-24A

RI-90-25A

RI-90-26A

RI-90-27A

RI-90-28A

RI-90-29A

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 32 of 51

For setpoints REFER TO

3-SIMI-90B.

Sensor

RE-90-4

MG set area

Rx Bldg EI. 639

R-17 Q-L1NE

Location:

RE-90-8

Main Control Room

Rx Bldg EI. 617

R-16 R-L1NE

RE-90-9

Clean-up System

Rx Bldg EI. 621

R-16 T-L1NE

RE-90-13

North Clean-up Sys.

Rx Bldg EI. 593

R-16 P-L1NE

RE-90-14

South Clean-up Sys.

Rx Bldg EI. 593

R-16 S-L1NE

RE-90-20

CRD-HCU West

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-16 R-L1NE

RE-90-21

CRD-HCU East

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-20 R-L1NE

RE-90-22

Tip Room

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-19 P-L1NE

RE-90-23

Tip Drive

Rx Bldg EI. 565

R-19 P-L1NE

RE-90-24

HPCI Room*

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-21 U-L1NE

RE-90-25

RHR West

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-16 U-L1NE

RE-90-26

Core Spray-RCIC

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-16 N-L1NE

RE-90-27

Core Spray

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-20 N-L1NE

RE-90-28

RHR East

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-20 U-L1NE

RE-90-29

Suppression Pool .

Rx Bldg EI. 519

R-19 U-L1NE

Due to the location of the Rad Monitor in relation to the Test line in the HPCI

Quad, the HPCI Room Rad Alarm may be received when the HPCI Flow test

is in progress.

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Radiation levels have risen above alarm set point. HPCI Flow Rate Surveillance in

Progress.

None

Continued on Next Page

(

BFN

Unit3

Panel 9-3

3-XA-55-3A

3-ARP-9-3A

Rev. 0036 *

Page 33 of 51

Operator

Action:

RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH 3-RA-90-1D, Window 22

(Page 2 of 2)

A. DETERMINE area with high radiation level on Panel 3-9-11. (Alarm

on Panel 3-9-11 will automatically reset if radiation level lowers

below setpoint.)

B. IF the alarm is from the HPCI Room while Flow testing is being

performed, THEN

REQUEST personnel at the HPCI Quad to validate conditions.

C. NOTIFY RADCON.

D. IF the TSC is NOT manned and a "VALID" radiological condition

exists., THEN

USE public address system to evacuate area where high airborne

conditions exist

E. IF the TSC is manned and a "VALID" radiological condition exists,

THEN

REQUEST the TSC to evacuate non-essential personnel from

affected areas.

F.

MONITOR other parameters providing input to this annunciator

frequently as these parameters will be masked from alarming while

this alarm is sealed in.

G. IF a CREV initiation is received, THEN

1.

VERIFY CREV A(B) Flow is ~ 2700 CFM, and ~ 3300 CFM as

indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) within 5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> of the CREV

initiation. [BFPER 03-017922]

2.

IF CREV A(B) Flow is NOT ~ 2700 CFM, and s 3300 CFM as

indicated on 0-FI-031-7214(7213) THEN

PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)

[BFPER 03-017922]

a.

STOP the operating CREV per 0-01-31.

b.

START the standby CREV per 0-01-31.

H. IF alarm is due to malfunction, THEN

REFER TO 0-01-55.

I.

ENTER 3-EOI-3 Flowchart.

J.

REFER TO 3-AOI-79-1 or 3-A01-79-2 if applicable.

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

References:

3-45E620-3

3-45E610-90-1

GE 730E356-1

(

BFN

Unit 3

RBCCW

SURGE TANK

LEVEL HIGH

3-LA-70-2A

(Page 1 of 2)

Panel 9-4

3-XA-55-4C

SensorlTrip Point:

3-LS-070-0002A

3-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0028

Page 12 of 44

4 inches above center line of tank

Sensor

Location:

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Operator

Action:

RBCCW surge tank in the MG set room EI 639'.

A. Makeup valve, 3-FCV-70-1, open.

B. Bypass valve 3-BYV-002-1369 leaking.

C. Leak into the system.

None

A. CHECK make-up valve 3-FCV-70-1, 3-HS-70-1, CLOSED on

Panel 3-9-4.

B. CHECK RBCCW system water leaving the RBCCW system heat

exchangers is 100°F or less on 3-TI-70-3, Panel 3-9-4.

C. DISPATCH personnel to verify high level and to ensure

3-BYV-002-1369, FCV-70-1 BYPASS VALVE is CLOSED.

OBSERVE sight glass level.

D. OPEN surge tank drain valve, 3-DRV-070-0609. CLOSE valve

when desired level is obtained.

E. REQUEST Chemistry to pull and analyze a sample for total gamma

activity and attempt to qualify source of leak.

F. CHECK activity reading on 3-RM-90-131 Band 3-RM-90-131 D.

Continued on Next Page

o

n

o

o

oo

(

BFN

Unit 3

Panel 9-4

3-XA-55-4C

3-ARP-9-4C

Rev. 0028

Page 13 of 44

RBCCW SURGE TANK LEVEL HIGH 3-LA-70-2A, Window 6

(Page 2"of 2)

Operator

Action: (Continued)

NOTE

[NER/C) Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler leakage may be indicated by a rise in 3-RM-90-131

(Panel 3-9-10) activity (3-RR-90-131 /132, Panel 3-9-2 or 3-TE-68-54 or 67 temperature,

Panel 3-9-21) or a lowering in any Recirc pump seal pressure.

G. IF it is suspected that the Reactor Recirculation Pump seal cooler is

leaking, THEN

PERFORM the following:

DETERMINE which Reactor Recirculation loop is leaking and

ISOLATE. REFER TO 3-01-68 Section 7.1 or 8.2 as applicable.

Cooldown is required to prevent hangers or shock suppressors

from exceeding their maximum travel range.

0

WHEN primary system pressure is below 125 psig, THEN

ISOLATE the RBCCW System to preclude damage to the

RBCCW piping.

[IEN89-054, GE SIL-459)

0

H. START selective valving to determine in-leakage source , if present.

References:

3-45N620-4

3-47E610-70-1

FSAR Sections 10.6.4 and 13.6.2

3-47E822-1

(

EOI - 3

OPL171.034

Revision 11

Appendix C

Page 30 of 30

TABLE 4

SECONDARY CONTAINMENT AREA RADIATION

APPLICABLE

MAX NORMAL

MAX SAFE

POTENTIAL

AREA

RADIATION

VALUE

VALUE

ISOLATION

INDICATORS

MRIHR

MR/HR

SOURCES

RHR SYS I PUMPS90-25A

ALARMED

1000

FCV-74-47, 48

RHR SYS II PUMPS

90-2BA

ALARMED

1000

FCV-74-47,48

HPCI ROOM

90-24A

A LARMED

1000

FCV -73 -2, 3, 81

FCV-73-44

CS SYS I PUMPS90-26A

ALARMED

1000

RCIC ROOM

FCV-71 -2, 3, 39

CS SYS II PUMPS90-27A

ALAR MED

1000

NO'l E

TORUS

FCV-73 -2, 3, 81

90-29A

ALAR MED

1000

FCV-74 -47, 48

GENERAL AREA

FCV-71 -2, 3

RB EL 565 W

90-20A

ALARMED

1000

FCV-69-1, 2, 12

SDV VENTS & DRAI NS

RB EL 565 E

90-21A

ALARMED

1000

SDV VENTS & DRAINS

RB EL 565 NE

90-23A

ALARM ED

1000

NO'l E

TIP ROOM

90-22A

ALAR MED

100 ,000

TI P BAL L VALVE

RB EL 593

90-13A, 14A

A LARMED

1000

FCV-74 -47 ,48

RB EL 621

90-9A

ALARMED

1000

FCV-43-13, 14

RECIRC MG SETS

90-4A

ALARMED

1000

NO'lE

REFUEL FLOOR

90-1A, 2A, 3A

ALARMED

1000

NO'lE

TP -7 EOI-3 TABLE 4

E

MINATION

REFERENCE

.PROVIDED TO

CANDIDATE

(

~-oau

C")*-ow

~

il,H-t1UIIrrrn

I

SlH"ttrr-r<lI I I I

~

1!l1 !!

!!

I

-! I

  • i ,I: .

iiiI III! iii!

II 1 II

I

orII

I iI iiiI 1111 I

I

r

It ..

I I I!!

I I I'"III!

I' IIi I I I

I

I

C")*-ow

(

27. RO 201003K3.03 OOl/MEM/TIG2/85-3/Bl1/201003K3.03/3.6/3.7/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS

Given the following plant conditions:

AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure, directs a manual scram based on low reactor pressure.

Which ONE of the following PROCEDURAL reactor pressure limits should be adhered to in this case and

WHY?

A.

980 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due

to the loss of accumulators.

B.oI

900 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure a scram can be ensured due

to the loss of accumulators.

C.

445 psig reactor pressure, because this would be the lowest pressure required to lift a control rod

blade.

D.

800 psig reactor pressure, because this is the Technical Specification pressure for scramming

control rods for scram time testing .

KIA Statement:

201003 Control Rod and Drive Mechanism

K3.03 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the CONTROL ROD AND DRIVE

MECHANISM will have on following : Shutdown margin

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of CRD mechanism limitations and the basis for that limitation related to the ability to effect

and maintain shutdown margin.

References:

1/2/3-AOI-85-3, OPL 171.005, OPL171.006

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. The minimum pressure allowed by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.

2. The basis for that minimum pressure.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because 980 psig is the setpoint for the Low Accumulator Pressure

alarm.

B is correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure

specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because the entire statement is accurate, but is not the pressure

specified by 1/2/3-AOI 85-3, CRD System Failure.

OPL171.006

Revision 9

Page 17 of 60

C

(a)

A specific pattern of control rod

withdrawal or insertion

(b)

Written step-by-step path used by

the operator in establishing the

expected rod pattern and flux

shape at rated power

(c)

Deviation from the established

path could result in potentially

high control rod worths

(9) Shutdown margin

OBJ. V.B.15.c

(a)

Technical specifications of the

plant require knowing whether the

plant can be shutdown to a safe

level

(b)

Without the insertion capability of

Obj. V.B.20.g

all control rods, shutdown margin

will not be as great, thus closer to

an inadvertent criticality

(10)

Control Rod Worth variables

(a)

Moderator temperature

OBJ. V.8.20.e

i.

As temperature rises,

SER 3-05

slowing down length and

thermal diffusion length

increase

ii.

Rod worth increases with

as moderator temperature

increases

(b)

Void effects on rod worth

i.

As voids increase, average

neutron flux energy

increases

ii.

U238 and Pu240 will

(

capture more epithermal

neutrons through

resonance

(

BFN

CRD System Failure

1-AOI-85-3

Unit 1

Rev. 0003

Page 7 of 11

4.1

Immediate Actions (continued)

[2]

IF operating CRD PUMP has tripped AND backup CRD PUMP

is NOT available, THEN (Otherwise N/A)

PERFORM the following at Panel 1-9-5:

[2.1 ]

PLACE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11 ,

in MAN at minimum setting.

D

[2.2]

ATTEMPT TO RESTART tripped CRD Pump using one

of the following:

CRD PUMP 1B, using 1-HS-85-2A

CRD Pump 1A, using 1-HS-85-1A

D

[2.3]

ADJUST CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,

1-FIC-85-11, to establish the following conditions:

CRD CLG WTR HDR DP, 1-PDI-85-18A,

approximately 20 psid.

D

CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL, 1-FIC-85-11,

between 40 and 65 gpm.

D

[2.4]

BALANCE CRD SYSTEM FLOW CONTROL,

1-FIC-85-11 , and PLACE in AUTO or BALANCE.

D

[3]

IF Reactor Pressure is less than 900 psig AND either of the

following conditions exists:

In-service CRD Pump tripped and neither CRD Pump can

be started , OR

Charging Water Pressure can NOT be restored and

maintained above 940 psig, THEN

PERFORM the following: (Otherwise N/A)

[3.1]

[3.2]

MANUALLY SCRAM Reactor and IMMEDIATELY

PLACE the Reactor Mode Switch in the SHUTDOWN

position.

REFER TO 1-AOI-100-1. [Item 020]

D

D

OPL 171.006

Revision 9

Page 30 of 60

(

(6)

The withdraw motion is terminated prior

to reaching the desired position and the

rod is settled as discussed earlier.

d.

Cooling water is continuously supplied via the

P-under port and insert header.

(1)

Flow from plug type orifice in flange

follows passage between outer tube and

thermal sleeve to outer screen.

(2)

Cooling water is required to protect the

OBJ. V.B.18

graphitar seals from high reactor

temperatures.

(3)

Long exposures at high temperatures will

result in brittle, fast- wearing seals.

(4)

Drive temperature should be maintained

at <350°F and the cause should be

investigated if it exceeds this value.

(5)

Concern is that the high temperature

may be caused by a leaking scram

discharge valve.

(6)

This problem should be corrected as

soon as possible to prevent damage to

the valve.

e.

Scram function

(1)

There are two sources of water that can

OBJ. V.B/E.11,

be used to scram a drive: reactor water

V.D.10

and accumulator water.

(2)

Reactor water scram feature

(a)

Reactor water, if at high enough

pressure, is capable of scramming

More on required

the drive without any accumulator

amount of

assistance.

pressure to lift

drive and control

(b)

The over-piston area is opened to

rod later in LP.

the scram discharge header.

(

(2)

The primary effect is reduced 10 of the

inner tube just below the bottom of the

collet piston.

(a)

In serious overpressure situations,

this squeezes the inner tube

against the circumference of the

index tube.

(b)

The index tube is then held in the

insert overtravel position and often

cannot be withdrawn.

OPL171 .006

Revision 9

Page 35 of 60

(3)

Bulging of the index tube as described

above also occurs.

b.

Extensive procedural controls are specified to

prevent improper valving of the hydraulic

module.

c.

Particular caution should be observed during

the startup test program.

3.

Scram Capability

a.

Piston areas

(1)

Under-piston area equals 4.0 in2.

(2)

Over-piston area equals 2.8 in2.

b.

Normal scram forces

(1)

During a normal scram condition, the

over-piston area is opened to the scram

discharge volume which is initially at

atmospheric pressure.

(2)

Accumulator and/or reactor pressure is

simultaneously applied to the under-

piston area. The net initial force applied

to the drive (taking no credit for the

accumulator) can be calculated as

follows.

Fnet =(Forces Up) - (Forces Down)

(

Fnet = (Rx Pressure x Under-Piston Area) -

(Rx Pressure x Area of Index Tube

+ Weight of Blade + Friction)

Fnet =(1000 psig x 4.0 in2) - [1000 psig

x (4.0 in2 - 1.2 in2)] - 255 Ibs -

- 500 Ibs

Fnet = 4000 - 2800 - 255 - 500

OPL171.006

Revision 9

Page 36 of 60

Note: 4 in2

upward force -

1.2 in2

downward force

= 2.8 in2

Fnet = 445 Ibs

(Upward)

c.

Single failure proof - There is no single-mode

failure to the hydraulic system which would

prevent the drive from scramming .

d.

Accumulator versus reactor vessel pressure

scrams

(1 )

TP-9 represents a plot of 90 percent

scram times versus reactor pressure.

(a)

Reactor pressure only

(b)

Accumulator pressure only

(c)

Combined reactor and

accumulator pressure

TP-9

(2)

Scram times are measured for only the

first 90% of the rod insertion since the

buffer holes at the top end of the stroke

slow the drive.

(3)

Reactor-pressure-only scram

(a)

As can be seen from TP-9, the

drive cannot be scrammed with

reactor pressure ~ 400 psig.

(b)

The net initial upward force

available to scram the drive can

be calculated as follows.

OPL171.006

Revision 9

Page 38 of 60

(

e.

Average scram times (normal drive)

TP-9

(1)

Technical Specifications state that scram

times are to be obtained without reliance

on the CRD pumps.

(2)

Consequently, the charging water must

be valved out on the drive to be tested.

(3)

Maximum scram time for a typical drive

occurs at 800 psig reactor pressure.

(4)

This is why Technical Specifications

specify that scram times are to be taken

at 800 psig or greater reactor pressure.

f.

Abnormal scram conditions

(1)

Scram outlet valve failure to open

(2)

Drive will slowly scram on seal leakage

as long as accumulator charging water

pressure stays greater than reactor

pressure.

(3)

If the accumulator is not available, the

drive will not scram (this is a double

failure).

g.

Control Rods failure to Insert After Scram

Obj. V.D.11

(1)

This condition could be due to hydraulic

lock.

(2)

Procedure has operator close the

See 2-01-85 &2-

Withdraw Riser Isolation valve. Connect

EOI App-1 E for

drain hose to Withdraw Riser Vent Test

detailed

Connection on the affected HCU. Slowly

operations

open Withdraw Riser Vent. When inward

motion has stopped, close Withdraw

Self Check

Riser Vent.

Peer Check

(

(

28. RO 201006K4.09 OOl/MEM/T2G2/RWM//201006K4.09/3.2/3.2/RO/SR0/11/l6/07 RMS

The Rod Worth Minimizer must be INITIALIZED to properly determine rod position and sequence.

Which ONE of the following describes how RWM System INITIALIZATION is accomplished?

A.

INITIALIZATION occurs automatically when the RWM is unbypassed.

B.

INITIALIZATION occurs automatically every 5 seconds while in the transition zone.

C.oI INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when the

RWM is unbypassed.

D.

INITIALIZATION must be performed manually using the INITIALIZATION push-button when power

drops below the LPSP.

KIA Statement:

201006 RWM

K4.09 - Knowledge of ROD WORTH MINIMIZER SYSTEM (RWM) (PLANT SPECIF IC) design feature(s)

and/or interlocks which provide for the following : System initialization : P-Spec(Not-BWR6)

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific of

which plant condition would INITIALIZE the RWM.

References:

1/2/3-01-85, OPL 171.024

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. When RWM INITIALIZATION is required .

2. How RWM INITIALIZATION is accomplished.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because initialization is required when the RWM is unbypassed, but this

must be done manually.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM automatically initiates a "scanllatch" to determine the

correct latched rod group, but this is not the same as INITIALIZATION.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because the RWM must be manually INITIALIZED, but the RWM does

not require initialization because the LPSP is reached. THe RWM will automatically perform a

"scanllatch" at that point.

OPL171.024

Revision 13

Page 19 of 53

(

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

(2)

The MANUAL indicator light will then be Obj. V.B.6

lit and all error and alarm indications

that were on prior to bypass will be

blanked out on the RWM system

displays.

(3)

A manual bypass will also light the

RWM and PROGR indicator on the

RWM-COMP-PROGR-BUFF

pushbutton.

f.

SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton

switch/indicator

(1)

The SYSTEM INITIALIZE switch is

depressed to initialize the RWM

system.

(2)

Initialization must be performed

whenever the RWM has been taken off

line, as occurs whenever the RWM

program is aborted or manually

bypassed.

(3)

Therefore, following any program abort

or bypass, the SYSTEM INITIALIZE

switch must be depressed before the

program can be run again.

(4)

The SYSTEM INITIALIZE window

lights white while the switch is held

down.

g.

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTIC switch/indicator

(1)

This switch can be pressed at any time

after the system has been initialized to

request that the system diagnostic

routine be performed.

(2)

The RWM program will thereupon be

initiated and will perform the routine,

which consists of applying and then

removing in sequence the insert and

withdraw blocks (nominal 10 second

frequency).

(3)

The operator can verify the operability

NOTE: Rod insert

of the rod block circuits by observing

and withdrawal

(

that the INSERT BLOCK and

permit lights will go

WITHDRAW BLOCK alarm lights come

off when block is

on and then go off as the blocks are

applied.

(

(

BFN

Control Rod Drive System

1-01-85

Unit 1

Rev. 0005

Paue 136 of 179

8.18

Reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer

[1 ]

VERIFY the following initial conditions are satisfied:

The Rod Worth Minimizer is available to be placed in

operation

D

Integrated Computer System (ICS) is available

D

The Shift Manager/Reactor Engineer has directed

reinitialization of the Rod Worth Minimizer

D

[2]

REVIEW all Precautions and Limitations in Section 3.3.

D

[3]

VERIFY RWM SWITCH PANEL, 1-XS-85-9025 in NORMAL.

D

[4]

CHECK the Manual/Auto Bypass lights are extinguished.

D

[5]

DEPRESS AND HOLD INOP/RESET pushbutton.

D

[6]

CHECK all four lights (RWM/COMP/PROG/BUFF) are

illuminated.

D

[7]

RELEASE INOP/RESET pushbutton and CHECK all four

lights extinguished.

D

[8]

SIMULTANEOUSLY DEPRESS OUT OF

SEQUENCE/SYSTEM INITIALIZE pushbutton and

INOP/RESET pushbutton to place the Rod Worth Minimizer in

service.

D

[9]

IF Rod Worth Minimizer will NOT initialize, THEN

DETERMINE alarms on RWM Display Screen and CORRECT

problems.

D

[10]

IF unable to correct problems and initialize RWM, THEN

NOTIFY Reactor Engineer.

D

(

BFN

Control Rod Drive System

1-01-85

Unit 1

Rev. 0005

Page 19 of 179

3.3

Rod Worth Minimizer (RWM) (continued)

N.

For group limits only, RWM recognizes the Nominal Limits only. The Nominal

Limit is the insert or withdraw limit for the group assigned by RWM. The

Alternate Limit is no longer recognized by the RWM as an Acceptable

Group Limit.

O.

During RWM latching, the latched group will be the highest numbered

group with 2 or less insert errors and having at least 1 rod withdrawn past its

insert limits.

1.

With Sequence Control ON, latching occurs as follows: (Normally, startups

will be performed with Sequence Control ON)

a.

RWM will latch down when all rods in the presently latched

group have been inserted to the group insert limit and a rod in the next

lower group is selected.

b.

RWM will latch up when a rod within the next higher group is selected,

provided that no more than two insert errors result.

2.

With Sequence Control OFF, latching occurs as follows:

a.

For non-repeating groups, latching occurs as described above, OR

b.

For repeating groups, latching occurs to the next setup or set down

based on rod movement as opposed to rod selection.

P.

Latching occurs at the following times:

1.

System initialization.

2.

Following a "System Diagnostic" request.

3.

When operator demands entry or termination of "Rod Test."

4.

When power drops below LPAP.

5.

When power drops below LPSP.

6.

Every five seconds in the transition zone.

7.

Following any full control rod scan when power is below LPAP.

8.

Upon demand by the Operator (Scan/Latch Request function).

9.

Following correction of insert or withdraw errors.

(

29. RO 202001K6.09 OOl/C/A/T2G2/68 - RECIRC/24/202001 K6.09//RO/SROI

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 3 is operating at 55% power with Reactor Feed Pump (RFP) "A" & "C" running and RFP "B"

idling.

Both Recirculation Pump speeds are 53%.

The "A" RFP trips, resulting in the following conditions:

Reactor Water level Abnormal alarm sealed in

Reactor Vessel Wtr Level Low Half Scram alarm sealed in

Indicated Reactor Water Level drops to _10" before RFP "B" is brought on line to reverse the level

trend and level is stabilized at 33".

Which ONE of the following describes the steady state condition of both Recirculation Pumps?

A.

Running at 53% speed

B.

Running at 45% speed

c.Y' Running at 28% speed

D.

Tripped on ATWS/RPT signal.

KIA Statement:

202001 Recirculation

K6.09 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the

RECIRCULATION SYSTEM: Reactor water level

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions and times to determine the effect of a change in reactor water level on the Recirculation

System.

References: 3-01-68, OPL 171.007, OPL171.012

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

(

l

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Did plant conditions exceed the Recirc Runback setpoint.

2. Which Runback is appropriate for the given conditions.

A is incorrect. Total Feedflow would drop below 19% with only one RFP running at 55% rated power,

thus initiating a Recirc Runback to 28%. This is plausible based on the initial power level being close

enough to create doubt on total feedflow resulting from the trip of one RFP.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because a Recirc Runback DID occur, but the 45% speed given in the

distractor is the typical speed the Recirc Pumps run at during startup , not following a RFP trip.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because ATWS/RPT signals are associated with low RPV level, however

the setpoint is -45 inches and level only lowered to -10 inches.

(

BFN

Reactor Recirculation System

3-01-68

Unit 3

Rev. 0066

Page 13 of 179

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)

10. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the temperature of the

coolant between the operating and idle Recirc loops are within 50°F of

each other. This 50°F delta T limit is based on stress analysis for reactor

nozzles, stress analysis for reactor recirculation components and piping,

and fuel thermal limits.

[GE Sll517 Supplement 1]

11. The out of service pump may NOT be started unless the reactor is verified

outside of regions 1, 2 and 3 of the Unit 3 Power to Flow Map (ICS or

Station Reactor Engineering, 0-TI-248).

12. The temperature of the coolant between the dome and the idle Recirc loop

should be maintained within 75°F of each other. If this limit cannot be

maintained a plant cooldown should be initiated. Failure to maintain this

limit and NOT cooldown could result in hangers and/or shock suppressers

exceeding their maximum travel range.

[GE SIl251, 430 and 517]

M.

Recirc Pump controller limits are as follows:

1.

When any individual RFP flow is less than 19% and reactor water level is

below 27 inches, speed limit is set to 75%(-1130 RPM speed) and if speed

is greater than 75%(-1130 RPM speed), Recirc speed will run back to

75%(-1130 RPM speed).

2.

When total feed water flow is less than 19% (15 sec TD) or Recirc Pump

discharge valve is less than 90% open, speed limit is set to 28%

(-480 RPM speed) and if speed is greater than 28%(-480 RPM speed),

Recirc speed will run back to 28%(-480 RPM speed).

(

BFN

Reactor Recirculation System

3-01-68

Unit 3

Rev. 0066

Page 15 of 179

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)

R.

The power supplies to the MMR and DFR relays are listed below.

VFD3A

I&C BUS A (BKR 215)

ICS PNL 532 (BKR 30)

UNIT PFD (BKR 615)

VFD3B

I&C BUS B (BKR 315)

ICS PNL 532 (BKR 26)

UNIT PFD (BKR 616)

3-RLY-068-MMR3/A & DFR3/A

3-RLY-068-MMR2/A & DFR2/A

3-RLY-068-MMR1/A & DFR1/A

3-RLY-068-MMR3/B & DFR3/B

3-RLY-068-MMR2/B & DFR2/B

3-RLY-068-MMR1/B & DFR1/B

(

S.

A complete list of Recirc System trip functions is provided in Illustration 4. The

RPT breakers between the recirc drives and pump motors will open on any of

the following:

1.

Reactor dome Pressure ~ 1148 psig (ATWS/RPT). (Both pressure

switches in Logic A or both pressure switches in Logic B will cause RPT

breakers to trip both pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)

2.

Reactor Water Level s -45" (ATWS/RPT) . (Both level switches in Logic A

or both level switches in Level B will cause RPT breakers to trip both

pumps.) (2 out of 2 taken once logic)

3.

Turbine trip or load reject condition, when ~ 30% power by turbine first

stage pressure (EOC/RPT) .

1.

The ATWS/RPT A(B) logic to trip the RPT breakers is defeated if the

ATWS/RPT/ARI A(B) manual logic is armed using the arming collar on

Panel 3-9-5. B(A) logic would still be functional and trip the RPT breakers if the

setpoints are reached. If both manual push-buttons on 3-9-5 are armed,

ATWS/RPT automatic logic is totally defeated (no RPT breaker trip will occur if

the ATWS/RPT trip setpoints are reached). EOC/RPT logic and ATWS/ARI

logic will function without regard to the position of the arming collars.

ATWS/R PT/ARI logic can be reset 30 seconds after setpoints are reset.

(

(

30. RO 215001Al.Ol OOlIMEMlTIG2/TIPI121500IAl.Ol//RO/SROI

Which ONE of the following describes the procedural requirements in accordance with 2-01-94,

Traversing In-Core Probe System while running TIP traces?

A.

The TIP detector shall be withdrawn to the In-Shield position and the ball valve closed following

each TIP trace.

8.

Running a TIP trace while personnel are working inside the Drywell is prohibited.

C." The Radiation Protection Shift Supervisor is required to be notified prior to TIP System operation.

D.

The TIP Machine will automatically withdraw to the in-shield position, then the ball valve will

automatically close following a PCIS Group 6 isolation.

KIA Statement:

215001 Traversing In-core Probe

A1.01 - Ability to predict and/or monitor changes in parameters associated with operating the

TRAVERSING IN-CORE PROBE controls including: Radiation levels: (Not-BWR1)

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to determine the

operating limitations of the TIP system with respect to high radiation .

References:

2-01-94 Precautions & Limitations

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. Limitations for running TIP traces with personnel in the Drywell.

2. Notification requirements prior to running TIPs.

3. Which PCIS Group will cause a TIP retraction and isolation.

4. Requirements for running multiple simultaneous TIP traces.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because that limitation is placed on TIP operation, but only when TIP

operation is no longer required. The TIP detector can be stored in the Indexer in-between traces using

the same TIP Machine for ALARA concerns.

8 is incorrect. This is plausible because specific permission and controls are required to allow this

condition, but it is allowable.

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because the TIP response to a PCIS isolation is correct, but it is not a

Group 6 isolation.

(

BFN

Traversing Incore Probe System

2-01-94

Unit2

Rev. 0029

Page 7 of 26

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

A.

[NER/C] Verification of a digit in CORE LIMIT and DETECTOR POSITION

windows prior to or during TIP insertion ensures TIPs retain the ability to

determine its proper position. This will prevent malfunctions which could

damage the TIP detector.

[GE SIL-166]

B.

To prevent accidental exposure to personnel , immediately evacuate the area if

the TIP drive area radiation monitor alarms.

C.

[NER/C] Always observe READY light illuminated prior to inserting detector.

[GE

SIL-166]

D.

(NERlC] DO NOT move CHANNEL SELECT switch with detector inserted past

Indexer position (0001). The common channel interlock can be defeated in this

manner resulting in detector and equipment damage.

[GE SIL-092]

E.

(NERlC] Should detector fail to shift to slow speed when it enters the core, the

LOW switch should be turned on, switched to manual mode, and the detector

withdrawn.

[GE SIL-166]

F.

[NER/C] Length of time detector is left in core should be minimized to limit

activation of detector and cable.

[GE SIL-166]

G.

(NERlC] When TIP System operation is not desired, detectors should be retracted

and stored in chamber shield with ball valves closed .

[GE SIL-166] Storage of

detector in Indexer (0001) is allowed only for ALARA concerns and to prevent

unnecessary masking of multiple inputs to annunciator RX BLDG AREA

RADIATION HIGH 2-RA-90-1 D (2-XA-55-3A, Window 22).

. H.

[NER/C] Upon receipt of a PCIS signal (low reactor water level or high drywell

pressure), any detector inserted beyond its shield chamber should be verified to

automatically shift to reverse mode and begin withdrawal. Once in shield, ball

and purge valves close.

[GE SIL-166] Ball valve cannot be reopened until PCIS is

reset on Panel 2-9-4 and manual reset of TIP ISOLATION RESET pushbutton

2-HS-94-7D/S2 located on Panel 2-9-13.

I.

A detector should not be abruptly stopped from fast speed to off without first

switching to slow speed.

J.

[NER/C] Drive Control Units (DCU) should be monitored during withdrawal to

prevent any chamber shield withdrawal limit from being overrun. Detectors

should be stopped manually at shield limit if auto stop limit switch should fail

and verify ball valve closes.

[GE SIL-166]

K.

Only one TIP at a time should be operated when maintenance is being

performed in TIP drive area.

(

l

BFN

Traversing Incore Probe System

2-01-94

Unit2

Rev. 0029

Page 8 of 26

3.0

PRECAUTIONS AND LIMITATIONS (continued)

L.

[NRC/CJ DO NOT operate TIPswith personnel inside TIP Room or in vicinity of

TIP tubing and Indexers in Drywell. Requirement may be waived with approval

of Shift Manager and site RADCON manager or designee. In this instance,

RADCON is required to establish such controls as are necessary to prevent

access to TIP tubing and Indexer areas to preclude unnecessary exposure to

personnel working in Drywell. RADCON Field Operations Shift Supervisor is

required to be notified prior to operation of TIP System.

[NRC InformationNotice88-063,

Supplement2J

M.

No channel should be indexed to common channel 10 unless all other channels

are not indexed to channel 10 and all their READY lights are illuminated.

N.

[NERlC] DO NOT turn MODE switch to OFF on Drive Control Unit if detector is

outside shield chamber unless personnel safety requires it. [GE SIL-166J This

removes power preventing automatic withdrawal on PCIS signal and causing

ball valves to close on cable or detector. Tip Ball Valves CANNOT fully close

and shear valves may have to be actuated.

O.

CHANNEL SELECT switches on Drive Control Units should always be rotated

in clockwise direction when selecting channels.

P.

Connector on shear valve indicator circuit should not be removed while testing

shear valve explosive charges or performing shear valve maintenance with

detector inserted. This will cause an automatic detector withdrawal.

Q .

Continuous voice communication should be maintained between TIP operator

or maintenance personnel in control room and drive mechanism area while

maintenance is being performed and TIP detector driving is necessary.

R.

Each applicable ball valve should be opened prior to operating that TIP

machine.

S.

TIP Drive Mechanisms and Indexers should have continuous purge supply

unless required to be removed from service for maintenance.

T.

During outages when containment is deinerted for personnel access, TIP

Indexer purge supply should be transferred from nitrogen to Control Air for

personnel safety.

U.

Detector damage is possible if TIP ball valve is left open, or is opened during

DRYWELL PRESSURE TEST. (GE SIL-166)

(

(

31. RO 216000Kl.l O00l/MEM/T2G2/PR.INSTRJ9/216000Kl.lO//RO/SRO/

Which ONE of the following indicates how raising recirculation flow affects the Emergency System Range

indicators (3-58A -58B) and Narrow Range Indicators (e.g., L1-3-53) on Panel 9-5?

A.

No effect on Emergency System Range; Narrow Range will indicate higher.

B.

Emergency System Range will indicate higher; Narrow Range will not be affected.

C.

Both Emergency System Range and Narrow Range will indicate lower.

D.oI Emergency System Range will indicate lower and Narrow Range will not be affected.

KIA Statement:

216000 Nuclear Boiler Inst

K1.10 - Knowledge of the physical connections and/or cause- effect relationships between NUCLEAR

BOILER INSTRUMENTATION and the following : Recirculation flow control system

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of the effect of changes in Recirculation flow on reactor water level instrumentation.

References:

OPL171.003

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the effect of raising Recirc flow on

Normal Range and Emergency Systems Range level instrumentation.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments may read slightly higher at colder

conditions, but this does NOT apply to Recirc flow changes.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because Narrow Range instruments are not effected by Recirc Flow

changes, but Emergency System Range isntruments will read lower.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because Emergency System Range instruments will read lower, but the

Narrow Range instruments will not.

D is correct.

(

d.

Four ranges of level indication

OPL 171.003

Revision 17

Page 20 of 54

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

Normal Control Range (Narrow Range)

(1)

(a)

oto +60 inch range covering the

normal operating range (analog) with

+60" up to +70" digital and 0" down to

- 10" digital readings.

Obj. V.B.5

Obj. V.B.6

TP-3 shows only

analog scale

(b)

Referenced to instrument zero

(c)

Four of these instruments are

used by Feedwater Level Control

System (FWLCS). The level

signal utilized by the FWLCS is

not directed through the Analog

Trip System.

i.

Temperature

compensated by a

pressure signal

Obj. V.B.11.

Obj. V.B.13.

(

ii.

Most accurate level

indication available to the

operator

iii.

Calibrated for normal

operating pressure and

temperature

(d)

These indicators and a recorder

point (average of the four) are

located on Panel 9-5.

NOTE: An air bubble or leak in

the reference leg can cause

inaccurate readings in a non-

conservative direction resulting in

a mismatch between level

indicators.

This problem is particularly

prevalent after extended outages

when starting up from cold

shutdown conditions and at low

reactor pressures.

LER 85-006-02

(See LP Folder)

(Section X.C.1.j.

provides more

detail)

(

(e)

Four other narrow range

instruments are located in the

control room, two above the

FWLCS level indicators on panel 9-5 (3-208A & D), one above

HPCI (3-208B)and one above

RCIC (3-208C)on panel 9-3.

OPL171 .003

Revision 17

Page 21 of 54

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

Associated with

RFPT/Main Turbine

and HPCIIRCIC trip

instruments

(2)

Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) 2 Analog meters

and 2 Digital meters .

(a)

-155 to +60 inches range

covering normal operating range

and down to the lower instrument

nozzle return

(b)

Referenced to instrument zero

(c)

Four MCR indicators on Panel 9-

5 monitor this range of level

indication.

(d)

Calibrated for normal operating

pressure and temperature

(e)

The level signal utilized by the

Wide Range instruments have

safety related functions and are

directed through the Analog Trip

System.

(f)

Level indication for this range is

Obj. V.B.12.

also provided on the Backup

Control Panel (25-32).

(3)

Shutdown Vessel Flood Range (Flood-up

Range)

(a)

oto +400 inches range covering

upper portion of reactor vessel

(b)

Referenced to instrument zero

Calibrated for cold conditions

<<212°F, 0 psig)

(c)

Provides level indication during

vessel flooding or cool down.

(

Transient flashing effects can cause

indicated level to oscillate or be

erratic. As the reference leg refills,

the indicated level approaches a

more accurate water level indication .

The RVLlS mod decreases the time

necessary for this refill to occur

j.

Normal Control Range (Narrow Range) and

Emergency Systems Range (Wide Range) Level

Discrepancies

(1)

Narrow Range level instrumentation is

calibrated to be most accurate at rated

temperature and pressure (particularly

the instruments for FWLCS, since they

are temperature compensated). At cold

conditions the non-FWLCS instruments

read high (not temperature

compensated).

(2)

Wide Range instruments are also

calibrated for rated temperature and

pressure

OPL171.003

Revision 17

Page 32 of 54

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

(a)

The indicated level on the Wide

Range (9-5) is also affected by

changes in the subcooling of

recirculation water and the

amount of flow at the lower

(variable leg) tap.

Obj. V.B.15

(b)

At rated conditions with

minimum recirculation flow the

Wide Range instruments are

accurate. As recirculation flow is

increased past the lower tap it

has a significant velocity head

and some friction loss which

reduces the pressure on the

variable leg to the differential

pressure instrument, resulting in

an indicated level lower than

actual. This could be as much

as 10-15 inches error when at

rated flow and power.

(c)

Due to calibration for rated

conditions and no density

compensation at cold conditions

these instruments read high.

(

32. RO 219000K2.02 00l/C/A/T2G2/0I-74//219000K2.02//RO/SRO/NEW 10/16/07

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit-2 is at 100% rated power with RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling mode to support

a HPCI Full Flow test surveillance.

Unit-1 experiences a LOCA which results in a CAS signal initiation on Unit-1.

Which ONE of the following describes the current status of Unit-2 RHR system and what actions must be

taken to restore Suppression Pool Cooling on Unit-2?

A.

2A and 2C RHR Pumps are tripped. 28 and 2D pumps are unaffected . No additional action is

required.

B. 28 and 2D RHR Pumps are tripped. 2A and 2C pumps are unaffected. Place RHR Loop I in

Suppression Pool Cooling immediately.

c. All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling

immediately.

D~ All four RHR pumps receive a trip signal. Place RHR Loop II in Suppression Pool Cooling after a 60

second time delay.

KIA Statement:

219000 RHR/LPCI: Torus/Pool Cooling Mode

K2.02 - Knowledge of electrical power supplies to the following: Pumps

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions and times to determine which RHR pumps can be used for Suppression Pool Cooling.

References: 2-01-74, OPL 171.044

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

(

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Response of Unit-2 RHR pumps due to a Unit 1 CAS initition.

2. Recognize the difference between a Single Unit CAS and Simultaneous Unit CAS.

3. Recognize that Preferred and Non-preferred ECCS pumps do NOT apply with the given conditions.

A is incorrect. This is plausible based on RHR Loop II being the Preferred pumps for Unit-2.

B is incorrect. This is plausible if taken from the perspective of Unit 1 operation, not Unit 2 operation.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because all four RHR pumps on Unit 2 will trip, but they are locked out

from manual start for 60 seconds based on D/G and/or Shutdown Board loading concerns.

D is correct.

(

(

BFN

Residual Heat Removal System

2-01-74

Unit2

Rev. 0133

Page 331 of 367

Appendix A

(Page 2 of 7)

Unit 1 & 2 Core Spray/RHR Logic Discussion

2.2

ECCS Preferred Pump Logic

Concurrent Accident Signals On Unit 1 and Unit 2

With normal power available, the starting and running of RHR pumps on a 4KV

Shutdown Board already loaded by the opposite unit's Core Spray, RHR pumps, and

RHRSW pumps could overload the affected 4KV Shutdown Boards and trip the

normal feeder breaker. This would result in a temporary loss of power to the

affected 4KV Shutdown Boards while the boards are being transferred to their

diesels. To prevent this undesirable transient, Unit 2 RHR Pumps 2A and 2C are

load shed on a Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed

on a Unit 2 accident signal. Unit 2 Core Spray Pumps 2A and 2C are load shed on a

Unit 1 accident signal and Unit 1 Core Spray Pumps 1Band 10 will be load shed on

a Unit 2 accident signal. This makes the Preferred ECCS pumps Unit 1 Division I

Core Spray and RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 2 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.

Conversely, the Non-preferred ECCS pumps are Unit 1 Division 2 Core Spray and

RHR Pumps and Unit 2 Division 1 Core Spray and RHR Pumps.

The preferred and non-preferred ECCS pumps are as follows:

UNIT 1 & 2

PREFERRED ECCS Pumps

CS1A,CS1C,RHR1A,RHR1C

CS 2B, CS 20, RHR 2B, RHR 20

NON-PREFERRED ECCS Pumps

CS 1B, CS 10, RHR 1B, RHR 10

CS2~CS2C,RHR2A,RHR2C

UNIT3

Unit 3 does not have ECCS Preferred/Non-Preferred Pump Logic.

Accident Signal On One Unit

With an accident on one unit, ECCS Preferred pump logic trips all running RHR and

Core Spray pumps on the non-accident unit.

(

OPL171.044

Revision 15

Page 50 of 159

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

Note:

Presently Unit 1 Accident signal will not affect Unit 2 due to DCN H2735A that lifted wires

from relays. Unit 2 will still affect Unit 1.

However, the following represents modifications

to the inter-tie logic as it will be upon Unit 1 recovery.

(

f.

(1)

Unit 1 Preferred RHR pumps are 1A and 1C

(2)

Unit 2 Preferred RHR pumps are 28 and 2D

(3)

Unit 2 initiation logic is as follows:Div 1 RHR

logic initiates Div 1 pumps ( A and C), and Div

2 logic initiates Div 2 pumps (B and D)

Accident Signal

(1)

LOCA signals are divided into two separate

signals, one referred to as a Pre Accident

Signal (PAS) and the other referred to as a

Common Accident Signal (CAS).

  • PAS

-122" Rx water level (Level 1)

OR

2.45 psig DW pressure

-122" Rx water level (Level 1)

OR

2.45 psig DW pressure AND <450

psig Rx pressure

(2)

If a unit receives an accident signal, then all

its respective RHR and Core Spray pumps

will sequence on based upon power source to

the SD Boards.

(3)

All RHR and Core Spray pumps on the non-

affected unit will trip (if running) and will be

blocked from manual starting for 60 seconds.

Obj. V.B.13.

Obj. V.C.3

Obj. V.C.7

Obj. V.D.6

Obj. V.E.II

Obj. V.B.13.

Obj. V.C.3

Obj. V.C.7

Obj. V.D.6

Obj. V.E.II

Note:

It should be clear

that the only

difference

between the two

signals is the

inclusion of Rx

pressure in the

CAS signal. The

PAS signal is an

anticipatory signal

that allows the

DG's to start on

rising OW

pressure and be

ready should a

CAS be received.

OPL171.044

Revision 15

Page 51 of 159

(

INSTRUCTOR NOTES

(4)

After 60 seconds all RHR pumps on the non-

Operator diligence

affected unit may be manually started.

required to

(5)

The non-preferred pumps on the non-

prevent

overloading SO

affected unit are also prevented from

boards/DG's

automatically starting until the affected unit's

accident signal is clear.

(6)

The preferred pumps on the non-affected

unit are locked out from automatically starting

until the affected unit accident signal is clear

OR the non-affected unit receives an

accident signal.

g.

4KV Shutdown Board Load Shed

Obj. V.C .B.

(1)

A stripping of motor loads on the 4KV boards

occurs when the board experiences an

undervoltage condition. This is referred to as a

4KV Load Shed. This shed prepares the board

for the DG ensuring the DG will tie on to the

bus unloaded and without faults.

(2)

The Load Shed occurs when an undervoltage

is experienced on the board i.e. or if the Diesel

were tied to the board (only source) and one of

the units experienced an accident signal which

trips the Diesel output breaker.

(3)

Then, when the Diesel output breaker

interlocks are satisfied, the DG output breaker

would close and, if an initiation signal is

present (CAS) the RHR, CS, and RHRSW

pumps would sequence on

(4)

Following an initiation of a Common Accident

Signal (which trips the diesel breaker), if a

subsequent accident signal is received from

another unit, a second diesel breaker trip on a

"unit priority" basis is provided to ensure that

the Shutdown boards are stripped prior to

starting the RHR pumps and other ECCS

loads

(5)

When an accident signal trip of the diesel

Occurs due to

breakers is initiated from one unit (CASA or

actuation of the

(

CASB), subsequent CAS trips of all eight

diesel breaker

diesel breakers are blocked.

TSCRN relay

(

33. RO 226001A4.I2 OOlIMEM/T2G2/PC/P//226001A4.12/3.8/3.9/RO/SRO/

Given the following plant conditions:

A pipe break inside containment results in the below parameters:

- Drywell pressure is 20 psig

- Drywell temperature is 210°F

- Suppression chamber pressure is 18 psig.

- Suppression chamber temperature is 155°F.

- Suppression pool level is +2 inches

- Reactor water level is +30 inches

Which ONE list of parameters below must ALWAYS be addressed to determine when it is appropriate to

spray the drywell?

A.

-Suppression Chamber temperature

-Drywell pressure

-Drywell temperature

B.

-Suppression Chamber pressure

-Drywell temperature

-Suppression Pool level

C." -Drywell pressure

-Drywell temperature

-Reactor water level

D.

-Reactor water level

-Suppression Chamber temperature

-Drywell pressure

KIA Statement:

226001 RHR/LPCI: CTMT Spray Mode

A4.12 - Ability to manually operate and/or monitor in the control room: ContainmenUdrywell pressure

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

knowledge of which containment parameters are used to determine when Containmerit Sprays can be

used.

References: 1/2/3-EOI-2 Flowchart

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as MEM due to the requirement to recall

or recognize discrete bits of information.

0610 NRC Exam

(

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Orywell temperature and pressure are always required to ensure Curve 5 limits are not exceeded.

2. RPV level is always required to verify adequate core cooling is assured prior to diverting RHR flow

for Orywell sprays.

3. Suppression Pool level is always required to verify Suppression Chamber to Orywell vacuum breakers

are uncovered.

4. Suppression Chamber pressure is ONLY required when initiating Orywell Sprays from flowpath PC/Po

5. Suppression Chamber temperature is NOT required to initiate Orywell Sprays.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and press are required , but SC temp is not.

B is incorrect. This is plausible because OW temp and SP level are required , but SC press is ONLY

required when initiating OW Sprays using PC/Po

C is correct.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because RPV level and OW press are required, but SC temp is not.

WHEN

SUPPR CHMBR PRESS EXCEEDS 12 PSIG,

THEN

CONnNUE INTHISPROCEDURE

L

-_..._....----_.....__.__.._---------_...., ..

"

~'.

PClP-7

L

SHUT DOWNRECIRC PUfA'PS ANDOWBLOWERS

  1. 2

PUMP NPSH AND VORTEX m"TS

INITlAm r:JN SPRAYS USING W:lL:!PUMPSWIREQUJRED

ro ASSUREAIEQUATE OORE COOLING BY CON11NUOUS

INJ(APPX 178)

L

L

L

L

!:!

~

"

,p'

0"

..,J~"~

L

SHUT DOWN RSCIRC i'IIllWS RJO r:1"BLO'/IB'tS

L

L

L

(

34. RO 234000G2.4.50 OO l/C/NTIG2///234000G2.4.50/IRO/SRO/

Given the following plant conditions:

Fuel movement is in progress for channel changeout activities in the Fuel Prep Machine.

Gas bubbles are visible coming from the de-channeled bundle.

An Area Radiation Monitor adjacent to the SFSP begins alarming.

Which ONE of the following describes the action (s) to take?

Immediately STOP fuel handling, then

_

A.

notify RADCON to monitor & evaluate radiation levels.

B."

evacuate non-essential personnel from the RFF.

C.

evacuate ALL personnel from the RFF.

D.

obtain Reactor Engineering Supervisor's recommendation for movement and sipping of the

damaged fuel assembly.

KIA Statement:

234000 Fuel Handling Equipment

2.4.50 - Emergency Procedures / Plan Ability to verify system alarm setpoints and operate controls

identified in the alarm response manual

KIA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the corrective actions involving Fuel Handling equipment under emergency

conditions.

References:

1/2/3-AOI-79-1 & 79-2, 1/2/3-ARP-9-3A (W1)

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble ,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requires mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

(

REFERENCE PROVIDED: None

Plausibility Analvsis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following :

1. Whether indications are consistent with fuel damage or inadvertant criticality.

2. Based on the answer to Item 1 above, enter the appropriate AOI.

3. Immediate Operator Actions for the selected procedure, AOI-70-1.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because RADCON notification is a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,

however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.

B is correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because evacuation of ALL personnel is an IMMEDIATE action in

AOI-70-2 , however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action in the appropriate AOI.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because RE recommendations are a subsequent action in AOI-70-1,

however non-essential personnel evacuation is an IMMEDIATE action.

BFN

Panel 9-3

2-ARP-9-3A

(

Unit2

2-XA-55-3A

Rev. 0036

Page 4 of 50

FUEL POOL

SensorlTrip Point:

FLOOR AREA

RADIATION HIGH

RI-90-1B

RI-90-2B

For setpoints

2-RA-90-1A

RI-90-3B

REFER TO 2-SIMI-90B.

11

(Page 1 of 1)

Sensor

RE-90-1B

EI664'

R-11 P-L1NE

Location:

RE-90-2B

E1664'

R-10 U-L1NE

RE-90-3B

E1639'

R-10 Q-L1NE

Probable

Cause:

Automatic

Action:

Operator

Action:

References:

A. Change in general radiation levels.

B. Refueling accident.

C. Sensor malfunction.

None

A.

CHECK 2-RI-90-1A, 2-RI-90-2A and 2-RI-90-3A on Panel 2-9-11.

B. NOTIFY refuel floor personnel.

C. IF Dry Cask loading/unloading activities are in progress, THEN

NOTIFY Cask Supervisor.

D. IF airborne levels rise by 100 DAC AND RADCON confirms, THEN

REFER TO EPIP-1.

E. REFER TO 2-AOI-79-1 or 2-AOI-79-2 as applicable.

F. IF this alarm is not valid, THEN REFER TO 0-01-55.

G. IF this alarm is valid, THEN

MONITOR the other parameters that input to it frequently. These

other parameters will be masked from alarming while this alarm is

sealed in.

H. ENTER 2-EOI-3 Flowchart.

0-47E600-13

2-47E610-90-1

2-45E620-3

GE 730E356 Series, TVA Calc NDQ00902005001/EDC63693

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

o

(

BFN

Fuel Damage During Refueling

2-AOI-79-1

Unit 2

Rev. 0017

Page 3 of7

1.0

PURPOSE

This instruction provides the symptoms, automatic actions and operator actions for a

fuel damage accident.

2.0

SYMPTOMS

A.

Possible annunciators in alarm:

1.

FUEL POOL FLOOR AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 1).

2.

AIR PARTICULATE MONITOR RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,

window 2).

3.

RX BLDG, TURB BLDG, RF ZONE EXH RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,

window 4).

4.

REACTOR ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 21).

5.

RX BLDG AREA RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A, window 22).

6.

REFUELING ZONE EXHAUST RADIATION HIGH (2-XA-55-3A,

window 34).

B.

Gas bubbles visible, in the Spent Fuel Storage Pool and/or Reactor Cavity,

attributed to physical fuel damage.

C.

Known dropped or physically damaged fuel bundle.

D.

Portable CAM in alarm.

E.

Radiation level on the Refuel Floor is greater than 25 mr/hr and cause is

unknown.

BFN

Fuel Damage During Refueling

2-AOI-79-1

Unit2

Rev. 0017

Page 5 of 7

4.0

OPERATOR ACTIONS

4.1

Immediate Actions

[1]

STOP all fuel handling.

[2]

EVACUATE all non-essential personnel from Refuel Floor.

4.2

Subsequent Actions

CAUTION

o

o

The release of iodine is of major concern. If gas bubbles are identified at any time, Iodine

release should be assumed until RADCON determines otherwise.

[1]

VERIFY secondary containment is intact.

(REFER TO Tech Spec 3.6.4.1)

[2]

IF any EOI entry condition is met, THEN

ENTER the appropriate EOI(s).

[3]

VERIFY automatic actions.

[4]

NOTIFY RADCON to perform the following:

n

o

o

EVALUATE the radiation levels.

0

MAKE recommendation for personnel access.

0

MONITOR around the Reactor Building Equipment Hatch,

at levels below the Refuel Floor, for possible spread of the

release.

0

[5]

REFER TO EPIP-1 for proper notification.

o

(

(

BFN

Fuel Damage During Refueling

2-AOI-79-1

Unit 2

Rev. 0017

Page 6 of 7

4.2

Subsequent Actions (continued)

[6]

MONITOR radiation levels, for the affected areas, using the

following radiation recorders and indicators:

A.

2-RR-90-1 (points 1 and 2), 2-MON-90-50 (Address 11),

2-RR-90-142 and 2-RR-90-140 (Panel 2-9-2) .

0

B.

2-RM-90-142, 2-RM-90-140, 2-RM-90-143

and 2-RM-90-141 Detectors A and B (Panel 2-9-10).

0

C.

2-RI-90-1A and 2-RI-90-2A (Panel 2-9-11).

0

D.

0-CONS-90-362A (Address 09, 10, 08) for Unit 1, 2,

3-RM-90-250, respectively (Panel 1-9-44).

0

[7]

IF possible, MONITOR portable CAMs &ARMs.

[8]

REQUEST Chemistry to perform 0-SI-4.8.8.2-1 to determine if

iodine concentration has risen.

0

[9]

NOTIFY Reactor Engineering Supervisor, or his designee, and

OBTAIN recommendation for movement and sipping of the

damaged fuel assembly.

0

[10]

OBTAIN Plant Managers approval prior to resuming any fuel

transfer operations.

0

[11]

WHEN condition has cleared AND if required, THEN

RETURN ventilation systems, including SGTS, to normal.

REFER TO 2-01-30A, 2-01-30B, 0-01-30F, 0-01-31,

and 0-01-65.

0

(

BFN

Inadvertent Criticality During Incore

2-AOI-79-2

Unit 2

Fuel Movements

Rev. 0013

Page 5 of 8

4.0

OPERATOR ACTIONS

4.1

Immediate Actions

[1 ]

IF unexpected criticality is observed following control rod

withdrawal, THEN

REINSERT the control rod.

0

[2]

IF all control rods CANNOT be fully inserted, THEN

MANUALLY SCRAM the reactor.

0

[3]

IF unexpected criticality is observed following the insertion of a

fuel assembly, THEN

PERFORM the following:

0

[3.1]

VERIFY fuel grapple latched onto the fuel assembly

handle AND immediately REMOVE the fuel assembly

from the reactor core.

0

[3.2]

IF the reactor can be determined to be subcritical AND

no radiological hazard is apparent, THEN

PLACE the fuel assembly in a spent fuel storage pool

location with the least possible number of surrounding

fuel assemblies, leaving the fuel grapple latched to the

fuel assembly handle.

0

[3.3]

IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical

OR adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN

TRAVERSE the refueling bridge and fuel assembly

away from the reactor core, preferably to the area of the

cattle chute, AND CONTINUE at Step 4.1[4].

0

[4]

IF the reactor CANNOT be determined to be subcritical OR

adverse radiological conditions exist, THEN

EVACUATE the refuel floor.

0

(

35. RO 245000K6.04 OOI/C/A/TIG2/0I-35//245000K6.04/fRO/SRO/Il/28/07 RMS

Given the following plant conditions:

Unit 2 is operating at 100% power.

Main Generator is at 1150 MWe.

The Chattanooga Load Coordinator requires a 0.95 lagging power factor.

Generator hydrogen pressure is 65 psig.

Which ONE of the following describes the required action and reason if Generator hydrogen pressure

drops to 45 psig?

REFERENCE PROVIDED

A.

Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Pole slippage

will not occur at this power factor.

B~ Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Sufficient cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen

pressure.

C.

Reduce generator load below 800 MWe. Pole slippage will not occur at this generator load.

D. Reduce excitation to obtain a power factor of unity to maintain current generator load. Sufficient

cooling capability still exists at this hydrogen pressure.

KJA Statement:

245000 Main Turbine Gen. / Aux .

K6.04 - Knowledge of the effect that a loss or malfunction of the following will have on the MAIN TURBINE

GENERATOR AND AUXILIARY SYSTEMS : Hydrogen cooling

KJA Justification: This question satisfies the KIA statement by requiring the candidate to use specific

plant conditions to determine the effect of a loss of hydrogen cooling on Main Generator operation.

Reference Provided: Generator Capability Curve without axis labeled

Level of Knowledge Justification: This question is rated as CIA due to the requirement to assemble,

sort, and integrate the parts of the question to predict an outcome. This requi res mentally using this

knowledge and its meaning to predict the correct outcome.

0610 NRC Exam

REFERENCE PROVIDED: Generator Capability Curve without the axis labeled.

Plausibility Analysis:

In order to answer this question correctly the candidate must determine the following:

1. Current operating point on the Generator Capability Curve based on given condiions.

2. Recognize that pole slippage is only a concern when operating with a significant leading power factor.

3. Recognize that pole slippage is a result of under excitation, not excessive generator load.

4. Recognize that generator hydrogen pressure is directly related to cooling capability.

A is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the

generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. However, pole slippage is not a

concern at a unity power factor.

B is correct.

C is incorrect. This is plausible because generator load is properly reduced, but the basis for the

reduction is not related to slipping poles.

D is incorrect. This is plausible because reducing excitation DOES reduce heat generation within the

generator, but not sufficient enough to prevent generator damage. In addition, insufficient hydrogen

pressure exists at the current generator load even wih a power factor of unity.